Quick and Easy - Southern Cravings

Sassy Scotty Chicken Salad Chick Copycat Recipe

Anna Kate — Wed, 05 Jun 2024 16:56:14 +0000

If you love the Sassy Scotty Chicken Salad from Chicken Salad Chick, I’ve got the perfect copycat recipe for you! This recipe is made with bacon bits, rotisserie chicken, cheddar cheese, and ranch dressing and comes together for an absolutely addicting chicken salad! It’s super easy to make, affordable, and delicious. It’s not your average chicken salad recipe!

You really can’t go wrong with a classic chicken salad recipe, but the flavors in this version are next level! I love to make this at the beginning of the week and have it for lunch and quick dinners during the summertime. It’s refreshing and filling, too.

Sassy Scotty Chicken Salad

If you haven’t had the pleasure of visiting a Chicken Salad Chick restaurant, you are missing out! It’s a casual little spot that serves up delicious variations of pimento cheese, chicken salad, and a few other delicious side dishes (grape salad is my favorite!).

It’s a great place to grab a few items to go or have a quick bite to eat with a friend. The flavors are named with quirky little titles, like this Sassy Scotty recipe, made with bacon, cheddar, and ranch flavors. It’s probably my favorite flavor they offer.

Other flavors include Classic Carol, which is your typical chicken salad recipe. Fancy Nancy incorporates fruits and nuts. Buffalo Barclay is the buffalo version. The list goes on!

Knowing how to make a great chicken salad is part of Southern tradition. It’s also the perfect dish to take to a potluck or to make for quick sandwiches by the pool. I even like to snack on this with crackers, too!

Why I Love This Recipe

Simplicity: With only a few basic ingredients, including cooked shredded chicken, cheddar cheese, bacon crumbles, and ranch dressing, this recipe is simple but packed with flavor.
Budget-Friendly: Utilizing basic pantry staples and affordable ingredients, this recipe proves that delicious meals don’t have to break the bank.
Texture & Flavor: The combination of tender chicken, sharp cheddar cheese, crispy bacon, and creamy ranch dressing creates a savory blend of textures and flavors that make this chicken salad crave-able!
Quick Preparation: With straightforward steps and no-fuss techniques, you can whip up this salad in no time, making it a convenient option.
Versatile: Serve a scoop of chicken salad as a dip with crackers, on a croissant, or on a bed of fresh greens for a light and satisfying lunch or dinner.

Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

Cooked Shredded Chicken: I use a store bought rotisserie chicken for convenience, but you can also use poached chicken breasts, chicken tenderloins, or canned chicken.
Cheddar Cheese: Adds a sharp, tangy flavor and creamy texture. I prefer to shred my own cheese, but pre shredded cheese will work just fine.
Bacon Crumbles: Feel free to swap bacon bits for strips of bacon. Just make sure you get the real bacon bits and not artificial products.
Ranch Dressing and Mayonnaise: For the mayo haters, there’s zero mayonnaise flavor in this chicken salad recipe. The mayo and ranch packet make a delicious binder for the rest of the ingredients and add additional flavor. I will say that Duke’s Mayonnaise is a favorite!

How to Make Sassy Scotty Chicken Salad

Step 1: Prep the Chicken and Bacon

To start, shred the chicken into bite-sized pieces, and chop the bacon slices. As mentioned above, you can also use a store-bought rotisserie chicken and pre-made bacon bits as shortcuts.

Alternatively, you can also poach your own chicken. It’s a super easy process and only takes a few minutes!

Step 2: Assemble the Salad

To make the dressing, stir together the mayonnaise, ranch dressing, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper in a large mixing bowl.

Next, add the shredded chicken, celery, green onion, cheddar cheese, and bacon to the same bowl and stir to combine.

Chill in the refrigerator until you are ready to serve! To enjoy this just like the Chicken Salad Chick restaurant, serve on a croissant.

Tips

Reserve some bacon crumbles and green onion for garnish.
For a spicy kick, sprinkle crushed red pepper flakes into the salad mixture.
Experiment with different cheese varieties such as pepper jack or Swiss for unique flavor combinations.

What to Serve with Chicken Salad

Pair this Sassy Scotty Chicken Salad with freshly baked croissants or toasted whole grain bread for a satisfying meal. For a lighter option, serve on a bed of lettuce drizzled with balsamic vinaigrette for a refreshing contrast.

Here are a few ideas for side dishes:

Potato Salad
Egg Salad – have a salad duo for lunch!
Potato Chips
A cup of vegetable soup
Broccoli Salad
Grape Salad

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use store-bought rotisserie chicken for this recipe?

Absolutely! Using pre-cooked rotisserie chicken saves time and adds an extra depth of flavor to the salad.

How long will the chicken salad last in the refrigerator?

Stored in an airtight container, the chicken salad will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator.

Can I freeze the chicken salad for later use?

While technically possible, freezing may alter the texture of the salad, particularly the fresh vegetables and dressing.

What can I serve with this chicken salad for a complete meal

Pair the salad with a side of fresh fruit, kettle chips, or a cup of creamy tomato soup for a well-rounded meal.

Storing Tips

Store chicken salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Consume within 3 days for optimal freshness. Freezing is not recommended as it may compromise the texture of the salad.

Sassy Scotty Chicken Salad Chick Copycat Recipe

Course lunch

Cuisine American, Southern

Keyword chicken salad, easy recipes, lunch, meal prep, summer, summer recipes

Prep Time 10

Total Time 10

Servings

Calories 448kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

2 cups shredded chicken breasts or rotisserie chicken
¼ cup celery finely chopped, about 2 large ribs
¾ cup mayonnaise
3 tablespoons ranch dressing use your favorite bottled ranch
½ teaspoon garlic powder
½ teaspoon onion powder
Salt and pepper to taste
3 tablespoons green onion finely chopped (about 2 green onions)
1 cup crumbled bacon about 6-8 slices
1 cup shredded sharp cheddar cheese freshly shredded

Instructions

Shred the cooked chicken breasts or rotisserie chicken. If you are preparing the chicken fresh, set aside to cool.
Chop 6-8 pieces of bacon and add to a skillet over medium-high heat. Cook until all the crumbles are crispy and brown, about 8-10 minutes.
To a large bowl, add the mayonnaise, ranch, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper. Mix well.
Add the cooled chicken, chopped celery, green onion, bacon, and cheese to the bowl of the mayonnaise mixture. Stir until well-combined.
Chill in the refrigerator until ready to serve.
Serve on a croissant, bed of greens, or sandwich bread!

Nutrition

The post Sassy Scotty Chicken Salad Chick Copycat Recipe appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Southern Pineapple Casserole Recipe

Anna Kate — Tue, 07 May 2024 10:30:00 +0000

This recipe is so easy to put together in 30 minutes or less and comes together with a few simple ingredients and zero prep work. This easy side dish will be a cherished favorite at your Southern table.

I’m so excited to share this quintessential Southern dish with y’all today! I love the combination of sweet and savory flavors that comes together with the sharp cheddar cheese and the sweetness of the pineapple chunks. While cheddar cheese and pineapple may seem like an odd combination, once you have your first bite, you’ll be going back for more. Contrary to what you might be thinking, this is not a dessert recipe!

Easy Pineapple Casserole

Pineapple casserole is a Southern classic, typically served at family gatherings and potlucks. It’s been a staple in Southern homes for decades — just like ambrosia and pear salad. Traditionally, this casserole is served during holiday meals but can be made any time of the year. It’s a wonderful addition to Thanksgiving Dinner, Easter Dinner, Christmas Dinner …and it goes really well with a baked ham or pork chops, too.

It might seem like a strange combination, but hear me out! It’s the sweet pineapple, savory cheddar cheese, and buttery cracker crumbs from the Ritz cracker topping that create the perfect balance of sweet and savory. Plus, it’s so easy to make! Just throw everything into a casserole dish and pop it into the oven. Once it’s done, the texture is soft and tender on the inside with a contrasting crunch of the topping.

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Unique: The fusion of pineapple, cheddar cheese, and a crunchy topping is unexpected but incredibly delicious.
Easy to make: With straightforward steps and pantry staple ingredients, pineapple casseroles are a breeze to put together.
Crowd-pleaser: This dish has a way of wowing guests and sparking conversation.
Comforting: The warm, sweet, and savory combination is heartwarming and comforting.

Ingredients & Substitutions

Pineapple Chunks: Make sure to purchase the canned pineapple in the juice – not syrup. You’ll reserve a little juice to add into the casserole itself. You can also use pineapple tidbits, too. Fresh pineapple will not work with this recipe.
Sugar, Butter, and Flour: These ingredients are combined to thicken the casserole and hold it all together. Self-rising flour and all-purpose flour will work for this recipe.
Cheddar cheese: Adds a savory element to the casserole, giving it that extra bite! I recommend shredding a block of cheddar as pre-shredded cheese contains an anti-caking agent which will prevent it from melting.
Butter and Ritz crackers: These two ingredients come together to for the salty, buttery, cracker topping that is my favorite! You could also try any brand of buttery crackers, including cornflakes.

How to Make a Cheesy Pineapple Casserole

Please see the recipe card below for the complete list of ingredients, measurements, and instructions.

Step 1: Prep

In a large bowl, combine the sugar, flour, and the pineapple juice saved from the can. Toss in your pineapple and give everything a good mix.

Step 2: Assemble

Spoon the pineapple mixture into a square baking dish, then sprinkle a generous layer of cheese on top. Mix crushed Ritz crackers with melted butter for the topping, then spread it evenly over the cheese layer.

Step 3: Bake

Now, all that’s left is to bake it! Pop the casserole in the oven at 350F and bake it until it’s golden brown and bubbly. The flour will thicken up the pineapple juice as it bakes and cools, resulting in a jammy filling with a perfectly toasty and crispy topping.

Allow the dish to rest at room temperature for about 5 minutes before serving.

What to Serve with Pineapple Casserole

The unique flavor of this pineapple casserole pairs well with savory dishes like a spiral holiday ham, crockpot turkey breast, or prime rib. Pair it alongside other holiday classics like Southern cornbread dressing, green bean casserole, and mashed potatoes for a complete holiday dinner.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Melt the butter: Use melted butter for the topping to ensure it coats the crushed Ritz crackers evenly.
Baking: Bake the casserole until it’s golden and bubbly for the best texture and flavor.
Have patience: Let your pineapple casserole cool for a few minutes before serving to allow the flavors to meld together and the filling to thicken.
Don’t overmix: Try not to overmix the pineapple with the sugar and flour mixture to maintain the pineapple’s texture.
Use the right cheese: Pre-shredded cheese can be convenient, but shredding your own gives a fresher flavor.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have any leftover pineapple casserole, follow these simple storage tips:

Fridge: Any leftovers can be kept in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Just make sure to keep them in an airtight container or the casserole dish with a lid.
Freezer: I don’t recommend freezing this recipe since it will turn soggy once it thaws.
Reheating: To reheat your pineapple cheese casserole, warm it in the oven at 350F until heated through to your liking.

More Old Fashioned Recipes

If you enjoyed this pineapple casserole, you have to check out a few more old fashioned recipes like these:

Southern Pineapple Casserole Recipe

This Southern pineapple casserole is the perfect blend of sweet and savory! Chunks of pineapple, that bite of shredded cheddar cheese, and the buttery cracker topping make this one of those cherished old fashioned, southern classics! This recipe is so easy to put together in 30 minutes or less and comes together with a few simple ingredients and zero prep work. This easy side dish will be a cherished favorite at your Southern table.

Course Side Dish

Cuisine American, Southern

Keyword casserole, easy side dish recipe, old fashioned recipe, pineapple

Cook Time 30

Total Time 30

Servings

Calories 195kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

1 8×8 inch casserole dish

Ingredients

40 ounces canned pineapple chunks in juice drained (reserve 6 Tbsp. juice)
⅓ cups sugar
5 tablespoons all-purpose flour
1 cup Cheddar cheese freshly shredded
¼ cup butter melted
1 sleeve Ritz crackers crushed

Instructions

Preheat the oven to 350°F. In a medium size bowl, combine sugar, flour, and reserved pineapple juice. Add pineapple chunks and toss well to combine. Spoon pineapple mixture into a greased 8×8-inch casserole dish, and top with shredded cheese.
Combine crushed Ritz crackers and melted butter. Spread Ritz cracker topping evenly on top of pineapple mixture.
Bake at 350°F for 30 minutes, or until bubbly.

Nutrition

The post Southern Pineapple Casserole Recipe appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Homemade Garlic Bread

Anna Kate — Wed, 17 Apr 2024 17:05:15 +0000

The best homemade garlic bread recipe! With just a few simple ingredients like store-bought French bread, butter, garlic, Parmesan cheese, and a sprinkling of fresh parsley, this easy recipe is perfect side dish when you need garlic bread fast! The crispy edges are the perfect texture and the toasty bread is packed with flavor from the delicious garlic butter mixture. From the bakery to your dinner table in about 15 minutes!

Garlic bread is a classic side dish that’s delicious, simple, and very affordable…and tastes way better than any store-bought garlic bread. The best part is that you can use any bread you already have on hand. Yes, including sandwich bread!

Obviously, the very best garlic bread is made with a French bread loaf. The toasted texture just holds up so well when dipped into spaghetti sauce, vegetable soup, or any other saucy situation that needs to be soaked up! This is truly a great recipe and one that you can add a little variety to whenever necessary.

Why I Love This Recipe

This recipe is a lifesaver when you need a side dish in a pinch. With only four basic ingredients, it’s incredibly simple and budget-friendly. The combination of garlic and Parmesan cheese adds irresistible flavor to every bite. Plus, it pairs perfectly with a variety of main dishes, making it a versatile addition to any meal.

Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

Store-bought bread: The best bread for this recipe is a loaf of French bread. But any fresh bakery bread from your grocery store will work, too. Try pre-seasoned bread, like Italian bread with herbs, or any other freshly baked loaf of bread your family enjoys. Regular sandwich bread can also be used in a pinch!
Butter: Provides richness and helps the garlic and cheese adhere to the bread. Make sure to bring the butter to room temperature for easier mixing. You can substitute margarine if desired.
Garlic: Infuses the bread with aromatic flavor. Fresh garlic cloves are recommended for the best taste, but garlic powder can be used as a substitute.
Parmesan cheese: Adds a salty, nutty flavor and forms a golden crust on top of the bread. Feel free to experiment with other types of cheese like mozzarella or cheddar for a different twist.

How to Make Cheesy Garlic Bread

Step 1: Lightly Toast the Bread

Preheat your oven to 375°F (190°C).
Slice the bread into thick slices, in whichever way you desire.
Place the bread slices on a baking sheet and lightly toast, just until starting to crisp, about 2-3 minutes per side.

Step 2: Make the Garlic Butter Spread

Meanwhile, combine the minced garlic and softened butter in a small bowl. Add additional seasonings as desired. Stir until well-combined. For extra flavor, add a sprinkle of Italian seasoning or chopped fresh herbs like parsley or basil.

Remove the bread from the oven and spread a generous amount of the garlic butter mixture onto each slice, and sprinkle with parmesan cheese.

Step 3: Bake the Bread

Then, return to the oven for 10-12 minutes, or until the bread reaches desired crispiness and parmesan cheese is bubbly.

If you prefer crispier garlic bread, extend the baking time or even broil for a few minutes. For soft garlic bread, lightly toast in the oven, the spread the butter and garlic mixture and serve, omitting the parmesan cheese.

Expert Cooking Tips

Use day-old bread for better absorption of the garlic and butter mixture.
Don’t skimp on the garlic! The more garlic, the better the flavor.
Serve the garlic bread immediately for the best taste and texture.

Variations

Add sliced tomatoes or fresh basil leaves for a twist on classic garlic bread.
Sprinkle crushed red pepper flakes for a spicy kick.
Substitute different cheeses like mozzarella or cheddar for a unique flavor profile.

What to Serve with Garlic Bread

This easy garlic bread recipe pairs perfectly with pasta dishes, casseroles, soups, and more! This could even be served as a tasty appetizer served with marinara sauce for dipping. Its versatile nature makes it a crowd-pleaser at any gathering or family dinner.

Try these main dishes out:

Lasagna Soup
Baked Ravioli
French Onion Soup
Beef Stew
Baked Ziti
Spaghetti Sauce
Sheet Pan Shrimp Boil
Low Country Boil
Seafood Lasagna
Crab Legs

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use pre-sliced bread for this recipe?

Absolutely! Pre-sliced bread works well and saves time. Just adjust the baking time accordingly to ensure even toasting.

Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

While it’s best enjoyed fresh from the oven, you can prepare the garlic butter mixture ahead of time and store it in the fridge until ready to use.

Can I freeze leftover garlic bread?

Yes, you can freeze leftover garlic bread. Wrap it tightly in aluminum foil or plastic wrap and store it in an airtight container in the freezer for up to 1 month. Reheat in the oven or toaster oven until warmed through.

Can I use garlic powder instead of fresh garlic?

Yes, garlic powder can be used as a substitute. Start with 1/2 teaspoon per slice and adjust to taste.

What’s the best way to reheat garlic bread?

To reheat garlic bread, place it on a baking sheet and bake in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for 5-7 minutes, or until warmed through.

Storing & Reheating

When storing leftover garlic bread, allow it to cool completely before transferring it to an airtight container or wrapping it tightly in aluminum foil. Store in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

To reheat, place the bread on a baking sheet and bake in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for 5-7 minutes, or until warmed through. Alternatively, you can reheat individual slices in a toaster oven for a quick and crispy snack. Enjoy!

With this Easy Cheesy Homemade Garlic French Bread recipe, you can elevate any meal with minimal effort and maximum flavor. Try it tonight and watch it disappear in no time!

More Side Dish Recipes

Loved this recipe?

If you enjoyed this recipe, please consider leaving a star rating and a comment below! Your feedback not only helps others discover my blog but also gives me valuable insights from your experience.

Don’t forget to subscribe to my newsletter for the latest recipes. Thank you for supporting Southern Cravings!

Homemade Garlic Bread Recipe

The best homemade garlic bread recipe! With just a few simple ingredients like store-bought bread, butter, garlic, Parmesan cheese, and a sprinkling of fresh parsley, this easy recipe is perfect side dish when you need garlic bread fast! The crispy edges are the perfect texture and the toasty bread is packed with flavor from the delicious garlic butter mixture. From the bakery to your dinner table in about 15 minutes!

Course Side Dish

Cuisine American

Keyword Bread, easy recipes, easy side dish recipe, side dishes

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 15

Total Time 20

Servings

Calories 355kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

1 loaf French bread or store-bought bread
½ cup butter softened
4 cloves garlic minced
½ cup grated Parmesan cheese
Optional: Italian seasoning chopped fresh herbs like parsley or basil

Instructions

Preheat your oven to 375°F (190°C).
Slice the bread into thick slices, in whichever way you desire.
Place the bread slices on a baking sheet and lightly toast, just until starting to crisp, about 2-3 minutes per side.
Meanwhile, combine the minced garlic and softened butter in a small bowl. Add additional seasonings as desired. Stir until well-combined.
Remove the bread and spread a generous amount of the garlic butter mixture onto each slice. Sprinkle with parmesan cheese.
Return to the oven for 10-12 minutes, or until the bread reaches desired toastedness and parmesan cheese is bubbly.

Notes

Expert Cooking Tips:

Use day-old bread for better absorption of the garlic and butter mixture.

Don’t skimp on the garlic! The more garlic, the better the flavor.

Serve the garlic bread immediately for the best taste and texture.

Nutrition

The post Homemade Garlic Bread appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Easy Peach Cobbler Recipe with Cake Mix

Anna Kate — Tue, 16 Apr 2024 15:08:15 +0000

Satisfy your sweet tooth with this simple peach cobbler recipe made with canned peaches and dry cake mix! Just a few basic ingredients come together in a deliciously comforting dessert that’s perfect for any occasion. The delicious cake-like topping that forms from the combination of the heavy syrup from the cans of peaches, warm spices, and the melted butter over the top of the cobbler is almost like magic! Get ready to impress your family and friends with this effortless Southern favorite!

Also known as a peach dump cake or peach cobbler dump cake, this is the easiest dessert to make and a good one to have in your back pocket for the summer time. Serve it on its own or with vanilla ice cream for the ultimate summertime treat! Plus, it’s made all in one dish!

Peach cobbler is one of my favorite desserts to make, especially during peach season. But, using canned peaches instead of relying on fresh peaches makes it possible to enjoy my favorite dessert all year long! This easy cobbler recipe is the perfect dessert for unexpected guests or last minute summer get-together. Best of all, it’s prepared and baked all in the same dish, making this a no-fuss, easy dessert that will be a family favorite!

There is no need to knead any dough or make a complicated pie crust. The boxed cake mix creates a crispy, flavorful topping that enhances the warm, juicy peaches perfectly.

Why I Love This Recipe

There’s something magical about the simplicity of this recipe. With just a handful of basic ingredients like canned peaches, cinnamon, nutmeg, cake mix, melted butter, and cornstarch, you can whip up this dessert with a 5 minute prep time!

Simplicity: With minimal ingredients and straightforward instructions, this recipe is perfect for both novice and seasoned bakers alike.
Budget-Friendly: Utilizing pantry staples and affordable canned peaches, this dessert won’t break the bank.
One-Pot Wonder: Crafted entirely in a trusty cast iron skillet, this cobbler minimizes cleanup while maximizing flavor.
Speedy Preparation: From start to finish, you’ll have a steaming, fragrant cobbler ready to devour in no time.
Texture & Flavor: Expect a heavenly contrast of tender peaches against a crisp, buttery crust, infused with warm spices.

Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

Canned Peaches: The canned peaches make this easy to make even when peaches are not in season. Fresh or frozen peaches can be used, adjusting sugar levels as needed for sweetness.
Cinnamon & Nutmeg: These spices add warmth and depth to the cobbler, enhancing the peach filling. Allspice or pumpkin pie spice can be substituted for slightly different flavors.
Cake Mix: The cake mix forms the cobbler’s buttery crust, providing a light and fluffy texture with a slight crisp! Different flavored cake mixes may also be used. Try spiced, white, french vanilla, butter pecan, or even gingerbread.
Melted Butter: Butter adds richness and flavor to both the crust and the peach filling and forms the “crust” of the cobbler. Unsalted or salted butter may be used along with margarine as an alternative, though the flavor may vary slightly.
Cornstarch: Cornstarch works with the syrup from the peaches and thickens the peach cobbler filling, ensuring a luscious consistency.

How to Make Peach Cobbler with Cake Mix

For the complete instructions, see the recipe card below.

Preheat your oven to 350°F and lightly grease a 12-inch cast iron skillet. Making sure your oven is preheated is key to even baking.

You can also use a 9×13 inch casserole dish for this recipe.

Step 1: Make the Peach Filling

To your casserole dish or skillet, combine the peaches, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cornstarch. Stir to combine.

Remember, one can of peaches should be drained and one can of peaches should keep the syrup.

Step 2: Add the Cake Mix

Next, sprinkle the cake mix evenly over the top of the peaches. Do not stir! But, gently press the cake mixture into the peaches with the back of a spoon. The cake mix should be spread evenly across the peaches.

Then, drizzle the melted butter over the cake mix, covering as much surface area as possible. For a golden, crispy crust, ensure the melted butter reaches all corners of the skillet.

Step 3: Bake the Cobbler

Bake in the preheated oven for 45-50 minutes, or until the crust is golden brown and the filling is bubbly.

You may see places where the butter or filling isn’t reaching the cake mix during baking. In this case, add a few pats of butter to those areas during the last 20-30 minutes of baking.

If the crust browns too quickly, tent the cobbler with foil halfway through baking.

Allow the cobbler to rest for 10-15 minutes before serving with vanilla ice cream!

Expert Cooking Tips

To enhance the flavor of the cobbler, consider adding a splash of vanilla extract to the peach mixture.
For an extra crunch, sprinkle chopped pecans or walnuts over the cake mix before drizzling with butter.
Serve the cobbler warm with a dollop of whipped cream or a scoop of vanilla ice cream for a truly indulgent treat.

Variations

For a seasonal twist, substitute canned peaches with fresh or frozen berries, adjusting the sugar to taste. You could also use canned fruit filling as a short cut. Try apple pie filling, peach pie filling, or another pie filling.
Experiment with different cake mix flavors, such as yellow, white, or spice, to customize the cobbler to your preference.
You could also add brown sugar for extra sweetness.

What to Serve with Peach Cobbler

Pair this with a big scoop of vanilla ice cream or a dollop of whipped cream for a decadent dessert experience.

To complement a complete meal, serve it after main dishes like oven-roasted ribs, brisket, oven-roasted pork tenderloin, or a Dutch oven pot roast.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use fresh peaches instead of canned?

Absolutely! Adjust the sugar level to taste and consider adding a splash of water or juice to compensate for the moisture lost from fresh peaches.

How do I prevent the crust from becoming soggy?

Ensure the peach mixture is evenly spread in the skillet, and sprinkle the cake mix over it without stirring. This creates a barrier between the peaches and the crust, preventing sogginess.

Can I make this cobbler ahead of time?

While best enjoyed fresh from the oven, you can prepare the cobbler in advance and reheat it in the oven at 300°F for 15-20 minutes before serving.

What’s the best way to store leftovers?

Allow the cobbler to cool completely, then store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

Can I freeze peach cobbler?

Yes, you can freeze the cobbler for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.

Can I use a baking dish instead of a cast-iron skillet?

Although you can use a baking dish for this skillet peach cobbler recipe, the crust texture and baking time may be affected. Just ensure you continue checking on it while it cooks.

How do I know when the cobbler is done?

You’ll know this peach cobbler is done when it’s golden brown and slightly firm to the touch. The top should be crusty, and the peach filling should be bubbling.

Storing & Reheating

Enjoy the peach cobbler fresh from the oven for optimal flavor and texture.

If storing leftovers, allow the cobbler to cool completely before transferring it to an airtight container and refrigerating for up to 3 days.

To reheat, place individual servings in the oven at 300°F (150°C) for 15-20 minutes, or until heated through.

For longer-term storage, freeze the cobbler in an airtight container for up to 3 months, thawing overnight in the refrigerator before reheating as directed.

More Dessert Recipes

If you have a sweet tooth like me, you’ll have to check out some more of my favorite dessert recipes like this skillet peach cobbler:

Loved this recipe?

If you enjoyed this recipe, please consider leaving a star rating and a comment below! Your feedback not only helps others discover my blog but also gives me valuable insights from your experience.

Don’t forget to subscribe to my newsletter for the latest recipes. Thank you for supporting Southern Cravings!

Easy Peach Cobbler with Cake Mix

Make this easy peach cobbler recipe with cake mix! I love the simplicity of using dry cake mix and canned peaches for this recipe. The delicious cake-like topping that forms from the combination of the heavy syrup from the cans of peaches, warm spices, and the melted butter over the top of the cobbler is almost like magic!

Course Dessert

Cuisine American, Southern

Keyword cake, dump cake, easy dessert, peach cobbler, summer

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 1

Total Time 1 5

Servings

Calories 374kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

9×13 inch Casserole Dish
12-inch Cast Iron Skillet

Ingredients

60 ounces canned sliced peaches in light or heavy syrup one can drained and one undrained
1 box yellow cake mix 15.25 ounce package
1 cup butter melted
½ teaspoon nutmeg
2 teaspoons cinnamon
1 tablespoon cornstarch
Cooking spray

Instructions

Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Lightly grease a 12-inch oven-proof skillet or 9×13 inch casserole dish.
Pour peaches into the baking dish (one can drained, one can undrained). Add nutmeg, cinnamon, and cornstarch. Stir until all combined.
Sprinkle cake mix over the top of the peach mixture. Do not stir, but gently press the cake mix into the peaches with the back of a spoon. Ensure the cake mix is spread in an even layer.
Drizzle the melted butter all over the top of the cake mix, covering the entire mixture.
Bake in the preheated oven until golden brown and the filling is bubbling, about 60 minutes.
Allow to rest for 10-15 minutes before serving with vanilla ice cream or whipped cream.

Notes

If the crust browns too quickly, tent the cobbler with foil halfway through baking.

During baking, you may see dry spots where the butter or filling isn’t reaching the cake mix. In this case, add a few pats of butter to those areas during the last 20-30 minutes of baking.

Nutrition

The post Easy Peach Cobbler Recipe with Cake Mix appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Whole Chicken Wings

Anna Kate — Wed, 10 Apr 2024 10:00:00 +0000

These air fryer whole chicken wings are crispy, succulent, and downright addicting! With just 8 ingredients and the convenience of the air fryer, this recipe delivers mouthwatering results that are impossible to resist. Serve them for game days, potlucks, and backyard get-togethers!

Whether you’re hosting friends and family or just craving a savory snack, these air fryer whole chicken wings are always a hit! Like my air fryer buffalo wings, they turn out perfectly crispy without the mess of a deep fryer.

Why I Love This Recipe

There’s something incredibly satisfying about a recipe that’s easy to make yet delivers crowd-pleasing flavors, and these air fryer whole chicken wings do just that.

Simply toss the chicken wings with a few pantry spices and oil, then let the air fryer work its magic. The result is a plate of wings with crispy skin, juicy meat, and big, bold flavors that the whole family will love.

If you love a good dipping sauce, try this lemon pepper wing sauce! So tangy and delicious!

Ingredient Notes

Besides the chicken, all of the ingredients in this recipe are pantry staples. Here is a breakdown:

Chicken Wings: For air fryer chicken wings, it’s best to use fresh or fully thawed whole chicken wings that you can split into flats and drumettes yourself, or you can buy them already separated.
Olive Oil: Ensures the wings cook up crispy and helps the spices adhere.
Garlic Powder: Brings a rich, aromatic, and ultra-savory flavor.
Onion Powder: Adds depth and a slight sweetness to the spice blend.
Smoked Paprika: Imparts a smoky, slightly spicy undertone but doesn’t overpower the other spices.

Substitutions

Oil: Avocado oil is another option with its high smoke point and neutral taste.
Garlic & Onion Powder: You can also use garlic and onion granules. Substitute them in a 1:1 ratio for a similar seasoning taste.
Smoked Paprika: Chipotle powder or ancho chile powder can offer a similar smokiness, but use them sparingly to avoid overpowering the dish.

How to Make Chicken Wings in the Air Fryer

These air fryer chicken wings are incredibly easy to make, especially with my step-by-step instructions and tips! Here’s everything you need to know.

Preparation

Split the chicken wings and remove the tips by locating the joint that connects the tip to the rest of the wing. Use a sharp knife to cut through the joint, separating the tip from the wing.

To remove the tips completely, simply cut at the joint between the tip and the flat, discarding the tip or saving it for making stock. Meanwhile, set your air fryer to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

Cooking

Step 1
Pat the chicken wings dry with a paper towel. Thoroughly drying the wings is essential to achieving that perfect crispy exterior.

Step 2
In a medium bowl, toss the wings with olive oil, salt, pepper, garlic powder, onion powder, and smoked paprika until they’re evenly coated. Make sure each wing is well-coated for the best flavor and texture.

Tip: Use my homemade classic chicken wing rub.

Step 3
Grease the air fryer basket and arrange the wings in a single layer. Do not overcrowd the basket, as this will prevent air from circulating freely and result in soggy wings.

Step 4
Bake the wings for 20-22 minutes, flipping them after 10 minutes. Use tongs for easy flipping and to keep the coating intact.

Step 5
Once the wings are done, remove them from the air fryer. If you’d like, you can toss them with your favorite sauce for extra flavor.

Expert Tip

To make the crispiest air fryer whole chicken wings, the real game-changer is making sure your wings are as dry as possible before tossing them with seasonings.

This simple step ensures the skin crisps up perfectly without being steamed inside the air fryer. Moisture is the enemy of crispiness, and taking the time to pat each wing dry with paper towels makes all the difference.

Cooking Tips

Preheat the Air Fryer: While not completely necessary, a preheated air fryer starts cooking the wings immediately, reducing sticking and giving them a crispier texture.

Grease the Basket: Lightly coat the air fryer basket with cooking spray to prevent sticking. This step is necessary even if your basket is non-stick.

Check the Temperature: Check the wings with a meat thermometer to ensure they’re fully cooked. They’re safe to eat at an internal temperature of 165 degrees Fahrenheit.

Let the Wings Rest: Give your chicken wings a few minutes to sit after they finish cooking. This helps redistribute the juices, keeping the meat tender and juicy.

Serving Suggestions

Serve your air fryer whole chicken wings on game day with other finger foods, like air fryer frozen meatballs, ham and cheese sliders, loaded nachos with pulled pork, and pigs in a blanket.

I also love mine with air fryer frozen sweet potato fries or regular air fryer frozen fries for a crispy, comforting pairing. And don’t forget some blue cheese dressing, Alabama white BBQ sauce, ranch, or a spicy aioli to dip the wings into!

Frequently Asked Questions

How do I know when the chicken wings are fully cooked?

Chicken wings are safe to eat when their internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit. Use a meat thermometer to check the thickest part of the wing without touching the bone.

Can I use frozen chicken wings?

Yes, but for best results, thaw them completely and pat them dry before seasoning and cooking. This helps achieve the crispy texture you’re after.

Why are my chicken wings not crispy?

This could be due to excess moisture on the wings or overcrowding in the air fryer basket. Ensure the wings are dry and cook them in batches if necessary.

Storing & Reheating

Air fryer whole chicken wings are best enjoyed fresh, but storing and reheating properly can help you make meals all week long! Let them cool completely before storing them.

Fridge

Cooked chicken wings can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge. They will last for up to 3 days this way.

Freezer

Freezing is an option for longer storage. Arrange the cooked wings on a baking sheet to freeze individually, then transfer to a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 2 months.

Reheating

Reheat the wings in the air fryer at 380 degrees Fahrenheit for a few minutes until they’re heated through and crispy. This method helps maintain the texture and flavor better than microwaving.

More Chicken Recipes

Loved this recipe?

If you enjoyed this recipe, please consider leaving a star rating and a comment below! Your feedback not only helps others discover my blog but also gives me valuable insights from your experience.

Don’t forget to subscribe to my newsletter for the latest recipes. Thank you for supporting Southern Cravings!

Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Wings

These air fryer whole chicken wings are crispy and downright addicting! With just a few ingredients and the convenience of the air fryer, this recipe delivers mouthwatering results that are impossible to resist. Serve them for game days, potlucks, and backyard get-togethers!

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, cheap dinner, Chicken recipe, Chicken Wings

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 20

Total Time 25

Servings

Calories 159kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

1 ½ pounds chicken wings
1 tablespoon olive oil
½ teaspoon kosher salt
½ teaspoon black pepper
½ teaspoon garlic powder
½ teaspoon onion powder
½ teaspoon smoked paprika
cooking spray

Instructions

Preheat the air fryer to 400°F.
Pat the wings dry with a paper towel.
In a medium bowl, toss the wings with olive oil, salt, pepper and seasonings.
Place the wings in a single layer in a greased air fryer basket.
Bake wings 20-22 minutes until skin is crisp, flipping the wings after 10 minutes.
Remove wings from the air fryer and toss with sauce as desired.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Whole Chicken Wings appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Whole Chicken

Anna Kate — Tue, 09 Apr 2024 14:39:04 +0000

This air fryer whole chicken tastes like a rotisserie chicken but requires only a fraction of the effort! With just 3 ingredients and an hour, you’ll have a balanced and nourishing meal on the table. It’s perfect for busy weeknight dinners and meal prep.

You won’t believe how versatile this air fryer whole chicken recipe is! Whether you’re looking to serve it as a main dish, shred it for chicken salad and air fryer quesadillas, or slice it for sandwiches, the possibilities are endless.

Why I Love This Recipe

This air fryer whole chicken recipe is a staple in my kitchen. Since I’m all about simple, fuss-free meals, I prefer to leave the trussing and extra ingredients for someone else. This recipe is basic but absolutely delicious.

The olive oil and poultry seasoning add just the right amount of flavor, resulting in a juicy interior and a perfectly crispy skin. Plus, the air fryer makes preparation even easier yet delivers a gourmet taste. I’m always surprised at how well this recipe turns out!

Ingredient Notes

With so few ingredients required, you can make this air fryer whole chicken recipe any night of the week. Here’s a full breakdown of everything you’ll need:

Whole fryer chicken: Fryer chickens are small, tender, and have a relatively high amount of moisture, making them ideal for air frying. If you’re unsure, ask the butcher at the deli counter to point you in the right direction.
Olive oil: Helps crisp the skin and adhere the seasonings to the chicken.
Poultry seasoning: Use store-bought or homemade. I use a store-bought blend of garlic, onion, sweet chili pepper, oregano, rosemary and basil.

Substitutions

Oil: If you don’t have any olive oil, use avocado, vegetable, or canola oil.
Poultry Seasoning: If you don’t have a premade poultry seasoning, you can create your own blend using dried herbs such as thyme, rosemary, sage, and marjoram. You can also use whatever spices you like to fit the cuisine, like taco seasoning, Greek seasoning, or Cajun seasoning.

How to Make an Air Fryer Rotisserie Chicken

This air fryer whole chicken recipe requires little hands-on effort, and my step-by-step instructions make it virtually foolproof. Make sure to read all my tips and tricks for the best results!

Preparation

If you have a frozen whole fryer chicken, make sure it’s completely thawed so it cooks evenly. Remove any giblets from the cavity and pat the chicken dry with paper towels. This helps the seasoning stick and the skin to crisp up.

Cooking

Step 1
Drizzle olive oil over the whole chicken, rubbing it in to coat it evenly. Then, season the chicken with poultry seasoning, salt, and pepper. Use your hands to rub the seasoning all over the chicken, including under the skin, for deeper flavor infusion.

Step 2
Preheat your air fryer to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Once heated, spray the basket with cooking spray and place the chicken breast side down in it. Starting the chicken breast-side down helps render the fat more effectively.

Step 3
Cook it for 30 minutes, then carefully flip the chicken to the breast-side up and continue cooking for 20-30 minutes. Use a pair of sturdy tongs and kitchen gloves to protect your hands when flipping the chicken.

Step 4
Check the chicken’s internal temperature with a meat thermometer, ensuring it reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit at the thickest part without touching the bone. Let the chicken rest for about 10 minutes before serving.

Expert Tip

Don’t let your air fryer whole chicken go to waste by serving it too quickly! The resting period gives the juices time to redistribute, giving you much juicer and more flavorful chicken pieces.

Also, I can’t stress the importance of letting your chicken thaw completely and come to room temperature. If you cook it from frozen or half-frozen, it will cook unevenly, resulting in overcooked and undercooked places.

Cooking Tips

Dry Thoroughly: Pat the chicken dry, inside and out, to help achieve crispy skin. You don’t want any moisture (or as little as possible) on your fryer chicken.

Preheat the Air Fryer: Always preheat your air fryer for the best results. Most modern air fryers have a ‘preheat’ setting that takes about 3-5 minutes.

Use Cooking Spray: I highly recommend spraying the air fryer basket with cooking spray to prevent the chicken from sticking as it cooks.

Serving Suggestions

Air fryer whole chicken works well with a wide range of sides. Pair it with a light, refreshing salad, like mixed greens with vinaigrette or my Caprese salad recipe.

For something heartier, try roasted oven roasted baby carrots, herb roasted potatoes, or air fryer frozen broccoli. For a more comforting option, shred it and add it to crustless chicken pot pie. There are too many options to list!

Frequently Asked Questions

How do I know when the chicken is fully cooked?

The chicken is cooked when its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit. To check the temperature correctly, insert a meat thermometer into the thickest part of the thigh, not touching the bone.

What if my air fryer isn’t big enough for a whole chicken?

For smaller air fryers, consider cooking chicken pieces or a smaller bird. The main thing is to not overcrowd the basket to allow hot air to circulate freely.

How can I make the skin extra crispy?

Make sure the chicken is completely dry, and lightly coat it with oil for crispier skin. Turning the heat up slightly during the last few minutes can also help.

Storing & Reheating

Leftover air fryer whole chicken is just as delicious the next day! Just let it cool to room temperature before storing it.

Fridge
Place it in an airtight container, or tightly wrap it in aluminum foil or plastic wrap. It will last for up to 4 days in the fridge.

Freezer

Freezing cooked chicken is another great option! Cut it into smaller pieces, wrap them tightly, and store them in freezer-safe bags or containers. The pieces can be frozen for up to 4 months.

Reheating

To reheat, place the chicken in the air fryer at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes until warmed through. For the best results, let the chicken come to room temperature for about 15 minutes before reheating it.

More Main Dishes

Pulled Pork Tenderloin

Mississippi Pot Roast

Boneless Pork Ribs

Air Fryer Boneless Skinless Chicken Thighs

Loved this recipe?

If you enjoyed this recipe, please consider leaving a star rating and a comment below! Your feedback not only helps others discover my blog but also gives me valuable insights from your experience.

Don’t forget to subscribe to my newsletter for the latest recipes. Thank you for supporting Southern Cravings!

Air Fryer Whole Chicken

Course Dinner Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, Chicken, meal prep, rotisserie, Weeknight Meal

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 1

Resting Time 10

Total Time 1 15

Servings

Calories 298kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

3 ½ – 4 pound whole fryer chicken these are on the smaller side compared to a roaster chicken
1 tablespoon olive oil
2 tablespoons poultry seasoning your choice
salt and pepper to taste Check to see if your seasoning blend already contains salt to avoid over-salting the chicken.
cooking spray

Instructions

Check the cavity of the chicken and remove the giblet back and neck if included. Pat the outside of the chicken dry with paper towels. Place the chicken in a large bowl or rimmed container for easy clean up.
Drizzle both sides of the chicken with olive oil and sprinkle with the poultry seasoning. You may need more or less than the recipe calls for. Use your best judgment, making sure the chicken is well-seasoned.
Allow the chicken to rest at room temperature for 30 minutes before cooking.
Preheat the air fryer to 350°F. When preheated, spray the basket with cooking spray and place the chicken breast-side down into the air fryer basket.
Cook for 30 minutes, then flip the chicken over and cook for 20-30 minutes more, or until an instant read thermometer reads 165°F.
Remove from the air fryer and rest 10 minutes before carving.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Whole Chicken appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Crab Salad

Anna Kate — Fri, 15 Mar 2024 17:41:44 +0000

This easy-to-make crab salad is perfect for any occasion, especially summer get-togethers! Made with lump crab meat, fresh veggies, creamy sauce, and classic seafood seasonings, it’s packed with authentic flavors in every bite. It’s delicious on a hoagie roll, as a dip with crackers, or served on top of salad greens.

Much like my crab cakes, I use real over imitation crab meat in this recipe to avoid artificial flavors and other synthetic ingredients. Trust me, it tastes way better too! Plus, no cooking is required for this crab salad, meaning minimal fuss and more enjoyment for you!

Why I Love This Recipe

When summer rolls around, I make this crab salad recipe on repeat! Nothing can beat the sweet, succulent flavors of jumbo lump crab meat, especially combined with a rich, creamy sauce and traditional seafood seasonings like Old Bay.

The preparation is also as straightforward as it gets! Everything comes together in a matter of minutes, then all that’s left is to let it chill in the fridge to meld the flavors. Whether you’re hosting a backyard barbecue, going to a potluck, or just want a nutritious, high-protein lunch, this salad fits the bill!

Ingredient Notes

This crab salad recipe combines fresh, flavorful ingredients for the quintessential summer dish. Here’s a closer look:

Jumbo lump crab meat: You can use fresh or frozen lump crab meat for this salad. You can even make your own baked crab legs and use this meat.
Veggies: I use red onion and celery to add a savory crunch that complements the crab meat and gives the salad a nice bite and depth of flavor.
Mayonnaise & sour cream: Provide a creamy and slightly tangy base for the salad. Use full-fat sour cream and mayonnaise for the best results.
Lemon juice: A classic seafood pairing! Lemon brightens up the salad and enhances the natural sweetness of the crab. Use freshly squeezed lemon juice.
Seasonings: I use Old Bay and celery salt to give the salad a warm, slightly spicy, and authentically coastal flavor. You can use store-bought or homemade seasonings.

Substitutions

Crab meat: If fresh crab meat is unavailable or out of your budget, canned lump crab meat makes a convenient alternative. Drain it thoroughly before use.
Veggies: Instead of red onion and celery, try shallots, cucumbers, or bell peppers.
Sauce: For a lighter version, use Greek yogurt to replace mayonnaise and sour cream.
Lemon juice: If you’re out of fresh lemons, use an equal amount of lime juice or a ½ teaspoon of white wine vinegar.
Old Bay seasoning: If you don’t have any Old Bay, use paprika, cayenne, and ground mustard. Start with 1 teaspoon of paprika, then add a pinch of cayenne and ground mustard, adjusting both to taste.

How to Make

Learn how easy it is to make this crab salad with my step-by-step instructions below.

Preparation

Place the crab meat on a paper towel to remove excess moisture. Gently press the crab meat with the paper towel, being careful not to break up the lumps. Finely chop the red onion and celery into small, consistent pieces.

Assembly

Step 1
Combine the mayonnaise, sour cream, lemon juice, Old Bay seasoning, black pepper, and celery salt in a bowl. Whisk the sauce until it’s smooth and the seasonings are incorporated.

Step 2
Add the onion and celery to the dressing mixture. Stir to evenly distribute and coat the vegetables.

Step 3
Pour the dressing over the crab meat in a mixing bowl. Gently combine the ingredients. Use a folding motion rather than stirring to maintain the “lumps” of crab meat.

Step 4
Refrigerate the salad overnight to allow the flavors to marry. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap before refrigerating it to keep the salad fresh.

Step 5
Before serving, garnish your crab salad with fresh parsley and a sprinkle of additional Old Bay seasoning for a pop of color.

Expert Tip

Even though store-bought crab salad from the deli is most often made with imitation crab, I can’t stress how much better fresh lump crab meat is in both flavor and texture.

The way you combine the crab meat with the dressing is just as critical here! Gently fold the meat into the dressing, rather than stirring vigorously, to preserve the lumps of crab. This step gives the salad a more satisfying creamy yet chunky texture.

Serving Suggestions

Crab salad is the perfect dish to bring to summer celebrations like 4th of July. For a complete spread, pair it with other summery options like Caprese salad, Southern pear salad, and zesty Italian pasta salad.

You can serve it on top of a bed of mixed greens drizzled with a light vinaigrette or tuck it inside a hoagie for a comforting meal. The creamy, rich flavors of this crab salad also complement crispy crostini or crackers, making it perfect for brunch or as an appetizer at your next gathering.

Cooking Tips

Quality of crab meat: For the best flavor and texture, always choose high-quality, fresh or pasteurized lump crab meat. Imitation crab will not provide the same results.
Chilling time: I highly suggest chilling the crab salad in the refrigerator for at least a few hours or overnight to let the flavors meld together for a more cohesive taste.
Serving temperature: Remove the salad from the fridge and let it sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes before serving to make the flavors more pronounced and enjoyable.

Frequently Asked Questions

How do I prevent my crab salad from becoming watery?

Ensure that the crab meat is thoroughly drained of any liquid and that the vegetables you use are not overly watery. If you are adding watery ingredients, mix them in just before serving.

What can I do if my crab salad tastes bland?

Adjust the seasoning with additional Old Bay, a bit more lemon juice for acidity, or salt and pepper. Tasting and adjusting the seasoning after the salad has chilled for a few hours can also help, as flavors meld and become more pronounced.

How can I ensure my crab salad is safe to eat during outdoor events?

Keep crab salad chilled until serving time by placing the serving dish over a bowl of ice, and don’t leave it out for more than 2 hours (1 hour if the temperature is above 90 degrees Fahrenheit).

Storing & Reheating

Crab salad is best enjoyed fresh but can be kept in the refrigerator for later.

Fridge

Crab salad can be stored in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Use an airtight container to keep it fresh and prevent it from absorbing other odors.

Freezer

I don’t recommend freezing crab salad due to the mayonnaise and sour cream, which do not freeze well and can cause the salad to become watery and separated once thawed.

More Seafood Recipes

Easy Crab Salad (Made with Real Crab)

Course Appetizer

Cuisine American

Keyword dip recipe, salad, Seafood

Prep Time 20

Resting Time 8

Servings

Calories 177kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

16 ounces lump crab meat not imitation crab
⅓ cup red onion chopped (½ small onion)
½ cup celery chopped (1 stalk)
½ cup mayonnaise
½ cup sour cream
1 tablespoon lemon juice
1 ½ tsp Old Bay seasoning
½ tsp black pepper
½ tsp celery salt
fresh parsley for garnish optional

Instructions

Drain liquid from crab meat and place in a medium sized bowl.
In a separate bowl, make the dressing. Combine mayo, sour cream, lemon juice, Old Bay, pepper and celery salt in a small bowl. Whisk to combine.
Stir in onion and celery.
Pour dressing mixture over crab meat and gently stir. You don’t want to stir the crab meat too much and ruin any “lumps” of crab.
Refrigerate overnight to allow flavors to marry. Garnish with fresh parsley and additional Old Bay if desired.

Nutrition

The post Crab Salad appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Egg Salad

Anna Kate — Fri, 15 Mar 2024 16:00:48 +0000

If you’re looking to make the best egg salad ever, this recipe is a must-try! With just a handful of ingredients, you can whip up this classic comfort food in no time. It’s the perfect dish for meal prep and versatile enough to be enjoyed on a bed of greens, in a sandwich, or by itself.

Other than my air fryer poached eggs, this egg salad is one of the most straightforward recipes I know! Seriously, it requires just 5 basic kitchen staples and about 15 minutes. Does it get much easier than that?

Why I Love This Recipe

When I’m in the mood for something simple and satisfying, I always whip up my favorite egg salad recipe. Once the eggs are boiled, everything comes together in one bowl, making it great for busy days when you’re short on time!

The texture is creamy with just the right amount of chunkiness. Plus, the addition of mayonnaise, Dijon mustard, and chives creates a classic and comforting flavor. Whether you’re whipping up a quick lunch or planning meals for the week, this is the egg salad recipe you need!

Ingredient Notes

Creating the best egg salad requires just a few key ingredients. Here’s what you’ll need:

Eggs: Look for farm-fresh eggs to give your salad a rich, creamy flavor and texture.
Mayonnaise: Mayo brings everything together, adding creaminess and a little tang.
Dijon mustard: Provides a sharp, tangy note that cuts through the richness of the eggs and mayonnaise. Use your favorite brand, but smooth is best.
Chives: Add a pop of color and a hint of onion flavor without overpowering the salad.

Substitutions

Eggs: For a healthier egg salad, incorporate more egg whites than yolks.
Mayonnaise: For a lighter alternative, you can use Greek yogurt or mashed avocado.
Dijon mustard: If Dijon is too strong for your taste, try yellow mustard or even honey mustard for a sweeter touch.

How to Make the Best Egg Salad

Find out how to make the best egg salad recipe with my easy-to-follow instructions below.

Preparation

I like to use my pressure cooker hard-boiled eggs recipe for the best results. However, you can use a pot on the stovetop. Place your eggs in a large pot and cover them with cold water by an inch.

Bring the water to a boil over high, then cover the pot and remove it from the heat. Let it stand for 10-12 minutes. Starting with cold water and then bringing the eggs to a boil helps prevent cracking and ensures even cooking.

Assembly

Step 1
Peel the boiled eggs and discard the shells. Gently roll each egg on the countertop to crack the shell before peeling. Peeling the eggs under water can also help remove the shell more cleanly.

Step 2
Dice the peeled eggs into eight pieces each and add them to a medium-sized mixing bowl. For a smoother texture, you can try using an egg slicer to dice the eggs evenly.

Dice the eggs as finely as you like. I prefer big pieces of egg, but any size will do just fine. It’s a matter of preference.

Step 3
Add 2 tablespoons of mayonnaise and 2 tablespoons of Dijon mustard to the bowl with the eggs. Stir them gently to combine, being careful not to mash the eggs too much if you prefer a chunkier texture.

Step 4
Season the salad with salt and pepper to taste, then stir in 1 teaspoon of dried chives. Mix until all the ingredients are well incorporated. For a flavor twist, try chopped fresh chives instead.

Step 5
Serve your egg salad immediately, or cover and refrigerate it for an hour to let the flavors meld together. Chilling the egg salad before serving not only enhances the flavors but also improves the texture, making it more cohesive and easier to spread on sandwiches and wraps.

Expert Tip

The secret to making the best egg salad is in the cooking and cooling process of the eggs themselves. Overcooked eggs have a rubbery texture and can produce a sulfurous smell, while undercooked eggs won’t provide the right consistency for your salad.

The ideal egg for egg salad is one where the yolk is fully set but not dry, and the white is tender, not rubbery. Cooling the eggs quickly after boiling stops the cooking process and also makes peeling easier.

Have an ice bath ready while they cook so you can immediately submerge them. Plunging the boiled eggs into ice water not only makes peeling easier but helps prevent a green ring from forming around the yolks.

Serving Suggestions

Egg salad is so versatile! You can make egg salad sandwiches, serve it on top of leafy greens, or add it to wraps and pitas. Pair it with crunchy pickles to add a refreshing contrast, or add some air fryer frozen French fries to the side for a comforting flavor.

For a heartier meal, serve it alongside a warm bowl of tomato or French onion soup or with a crisp garden salad or coleslaw. I also love serving it with a side of pressure cooker mashed potatoes or onion rings!

Cooking Tips

Dry the eggs: Pat the eggs dry with a paper towel after peeing and before chopping them to prevent excess moisture from diluting the flavor of your mayonnaise and mustard.
Balance the sauce: Start with less mayonnaise and Dijon than you think you’ll need. It’s easier to add more than to correct an overly saucy egg salad.
Add garnishes: A light sprinkle of paprika or fresh herbs before serving adds color and a hint of flavor that complements the egg salad without overwhelming it.
Serve at the right temperature: Egg salad is best enjoyed slightly chilled. Serving it too cold can mute the flavors, so take it out of the fridge 10-15 minutes before serving for the best taste experience.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make egg salad with just egg whites?

Yes, you can make egg salad with just egg whites for a lighter version. Adjust the seasonings since egg whites are less flavorful than yolks.

How can I add more flavor to my egg salad?

Incorporate fresh herbs, a dash of curry powder, or a sprinkle of paprika. Mustard, pickles, or capers also add a nice zest. Or, you can make the best egg salad recipe with relish!

Why is my egg salad runny?

Egg salad can become runny if too much sauce is used or if the eggs are not properly drained. Use less sauce initially and add more as needed.

Storing & Reheating

The great news is that egg salad can be prepped in advance and stored for future meals. Here’s what you need to know.

Fridge

Egg salad can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container, keeping it fresh for 3-4 days.

Freezer

I don’t recommend freezing egg salad as the mayonnaise can separate and affect the texture once it’s thawed.

More Salad Recipes

The Best Egg Salad Recipe

Course lunch

Cuisine American

Keyword easy recipes, lunch, quick recipe

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 10

Total Time 20

Servings

Calories 100kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

6 eggs boiled and peeled
2 tablespoons mayonnaise
2 tablespoons Dijon Mustard
salt and pepper to taste
1 teaspoon dried chives plus more for garnish

Instructions

Boil and peel the eggs.
Dice each egg to your preference, finely chopped or left in larger pieces. Add to a medium size bowl.
Next, add mayonnaise, and Dijon mustard. Stir gently until the eggs are well coated.
Add salt and pepper to taste and stir.
Garnish with chives. Serve!

Nutrition

The post Egg Salad appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Poached Eggs

Anna Kate — Mon, 12 Feb 2024 20:00:26 +0000

Air fryer poached eggs are a quick, easy, and convenient breakfast option ready in less than 10 minutes! Gone are the days of traditional water poaching methods and the messy aftermath. With this technique, you can achieve perfectly poached eggs in a hassle-free way!

Recently, I have been making all my favorite recipes in the air fryer because of how convenient and efficient this kitchen appliance is! This poached egg recipe has seriously revolutionized my morning routine, saving me so much wasted time. I can’t wait for you to try it!

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Time efficient: There’s no need to watch and wait for your water to boil. Just add eggs to ramekins and pop them in the air fryer!
Consistent results: With an air fryer, you don’t need to be a kitchen pro to achieve the same perfect doneness every time.
Customizable: You can easily adjust the cooking time to make your air fryer poached eggs with soft or hard yolks.

What Are Air Fryer Poached Eggs?

Air fryer poached eggs are a modern twist on a classic breakfast item, taking advantage of the efficient and even cooking power of the air fryer. Using this new-and-improved method, you can now make a traditionally challenging and delicate recipe with ease!

The eggs come out with a silky-smooth white and a perfectly runny yolk, while the taste retains that fresh egg flavor. If you haven’t tried poaching eggs in the air fryer, I highly recommend it!

Enjoy them in all the same ways you’d normally serve poached eggs. Sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and herbs, then add them to the top of avocado toast or serve them as part of eggs benedict with hollandaise.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Poached Eggs

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Eggs: For the ideal taste and texture, I recommend using farm-fresh eggs. It’s also best if they are large or extra large.
Avocado oil spray: To grease the ramekins, preventing the eggs from sticking. If you don’t have avocado oil spray, use canola or olive oil spray or melted butter.
Salt & pepper: Enhance the natural flavor of the eggs. Adjust both to preference. Himalayan pink salt or sea salt can be used for a different flavor profile.
Other seasonings: These are up to you! Feel free to play around with additional herbs and spices like paprika, chives, garlic powder, everything spice, or red pepper flakes.

How To Make Air Fryer Poached Eggs

Step 1: Prep The Ramekins

Start by preheating your air fryer. While preheating isn’t completely necessary, it reduces the total cooking time of the eggs. Lightly grease the ramekins with some avocado oil spray. This ensures your eggs will slide right out!

Step 2: Season The Eggs

Crack an egg into each ramekin, then sprinkle each one with some salt, pepper, and whatever other seasonings you’d like.

Step 3: Air Fry The Eggs

Pop the ramekins into the air fryer basket, making sure there is a little space between each one. Air fry them at 370F for 6-8 minutes depending on how runny or hard you prefer your yolks.

And there you have it! You’ve just made perfectly poached eggs without even boiling water.

Do I Have To Add Hot Water To The Ramekins?

I don’t find it necessary to add hot water to the ramekins before poaching eggs in an air fryer. The circulating heat from the air fryer is enough to cook the eggs directly.

However, for a more traditional preparation, you can add a few tablespoons of water to each ramekin before adding the cracked egg.

Recipe Variations

Eggs Benedict: Serve your air fryer poached eggs on an English muffin with bacon and a drizzle of homemade hollandaise sauce.
Southwestern style: Top them with salsa, avocado slices, and a sprinkle of cilantro.
Spicy: Drizzle with hot sauce or sprinkle with red pepper flakes before air frying.
Cheese: Sprinkle grated cheese on top before air frying for a cheesy layer.
Bacon wrapped: Wrap the ramekin’s edge with a bacon strip before cracking in the egg.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Ramekins: Ensure your ramekins are oven-safe and fit comfortably in your air fryer. They should also be deep enough to hold the eggs without overflowing.
Preheat properly: Preheat your air fryer for a few minutes to ensure even cooking.
Monitor the eggs: Check the egg at the 6-minute mark to gauge the runniness of the yolk and adjust the cooking time accordingly.
Avoid overcrowding: If you’re cooking multiple eggs, make sure the ramekins aren’t touching, allowing air to circulate freely.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you make a few extra poached eggs for later, follow these simple storage tips:

Fridge: Store leftover poached eggs in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
Freezer: It’s not recommended to freeze poached eggs as the texture can become rubbery when they’re thawed.
Reheating: Place the egg in simmering water for about a minute to reheat without overcooking. You can also reheat it in the air fryer for a minute at 300F, but watch it closely to avoid overcooking.

Additional Recipes

If you love the convenience of air fryers, check out some more of my favorite recipes like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

How do I know when air fryer poached eggs are done?

Your air fryer poached eggs are done when the whites are set and the yolks are slightly runny, but you can cook them longer if you prefer a firmer yolk.

Why is my egg sticking to the ramekin?

If your egg is sticking to the ramekin, you likely didn’t grease it well enough. Make sure to use a generous amount of spray oil to prevent sticking.

Can I cook more than one egg in a ramekin?

Yes, but make sure the ramekin is large enough and adjust the cooking time.

10-Minute Air Fryer Poached Eggs

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Breakfast

Cuisine American

Keyword Breakfast, eggs, poached eggs

Prep Time 3

Cook Time 7

Total Time 10

Servings

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ramekins or other oven-proof ramekin-style dish
Air Fryer

Ingredients

Eggs
cooking spray
salt and pepper to taste or other seasonings as desired

Instructions

Preheat air fryer to 370 degrees (takes about 5 minutes)
Lightly grease ramekins and crack one egg in each ramekin.
Season as desired.
Place ramekins in the air fryer basket.
Air fry at 370 degrees F for 6-8 minutes until the yolk of the egg reaches your desired doneness.

Notes

*After about 7 minutes, the egg yolk will be soft and runny. Ideal for Eggs Benedict.

Nutrition

Serving: 1

The post Air Fryer Poached Eggs appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Quesadillas

Anna Kate — Mon, 12 Feb 2024 19:47:51 +0000

Crispy on the outside and gooey on the inside, air fryer quesadillas are a serious game changer! Perfect for a quick lunch, snack, or casual dinner, they give you the timeless appeal of a classic chicken quesadilla with the convenience of an air fryer. Serve them with guacamole, salsa, and sour cream!

Why I Love This Recipe

Quick & easy: Everything is prepped and cooked in under 10 minutes.
Customizable: You can easily swap ingredients based on your taste preferences or what you have on hand in your kitchen.
Kid-friendly: Everyone loves air fryer quesadillas, even picky eaters!
Healthier option: Less oil is needed compared to traditional frying, meaning you can indulge without guilt!

Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Quesadillas

Quesadillas are universally loved for their crispy exterior and melty, gooey, cheesy interior. These air fryer quesadillas are all that and more, bringing a modern and convenient twist to a classic meal.

They offer the perfect combination of tender chicken shreds and melty cheese encased in a crispy flour tortilla. Plus, the air fryer makes this recipe virtually all hands-off!

Each bite is satisfyingly crunchy without being greasy. Enjoy this chicken quesadilla recipe on its own or with your favorite dips and sides.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Quesadillas

Tortillas: Flour tortillas work best for a soft yet crispy texture. However, you can also use corn tortillas or gluten-free flour tortillas if you have gluten sensitivities.
Shredded chicken: Adds protein and flavor. I like to use my Instant Pot shredded chicken recipe, but you can buy a rotisserie chicken and shred it. You can also use beef, pork, or refried beans for a vegetarian protein option.
Mexican blend cheese: Melts beautifully and adds a rich, creamy taste. Cheddar, Monterey Jack, and Chihuahua cheese are also delicious options.

How to Make Air Fryer Quesadillas

Step 1: Prep The Filling

Start by spreading shredded chicken and cheese evenly over half of your tortilla or tortillas. To prevent the tortilla from cracking, you can quickly heat it in a dry skillet or the microwave.

Step 2: Fold & Cook The Quesadilla

Fold the tortilla over the filling and place it in the air fryer basket. Set the air fryer to 350F and cook it for 8 minutes. Remember to flip the quesadilla halfway through for even cooking! For an extra crispy exterior, you can brush or spray both sides of the tortilla with vegetable oil.

What To Serve With Air Fryer Chicken Quesadillas

Pair these quesadillas with a dollop of guacamole, a scoop of fresh salsa, a side of sour cream, or even Alabama white BBQ sauce. They’re also great with a simple green salad, air fryer frozen broccoli, or crispy air fryer potatoes as a well-balanced meal.

If you’re looking for other filling ideas besides shredded chicken, try shredded beef brisket, pulled pork, or Southern baked beans.

Recipe Variations

Veggie-forward: Load the quesadilla with grilled and sliced vegetables like bell peppers, portobello mushrooms, and red onions.
Cheesy: Mix and match different cheeses! Try pepper jack for a spicy kick or Gouda for an ultra-creamy option.
Breakfast version: Add scrambled eggs and turkey bacon bits for a quick and easy breakfast idea.
Spicy beef: Use ground beef cooked with taco seasoning for a meatier option.
BBQ chicken: Toss the shredded chicken with BBQ sauce before adding it to the tortilla for a tangy, smoky twist.
Vegan: Use plant-based cheese and seitan chicken for a plant-based version.
Seafood: Fill your tortilla with sautéed shrimp and a sprinkle of cilantro.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Don’t overstuff: Overstuffing will lead to messy and undercooked air fryer quesadillas. Only add the filling to one-half of the tortilla, and don’t overdo it.
Preheat the air fryer: Preheating the air fryer isn’t completely necessary but ensures you end up with a crispier outside and a perfectly melty inside.
Flip halfway: Flipping halfway results in equally crisped sides.
Check for doneness: Adjust the cooking time based on your air fryer. You may need more or less time, so check the quesadilla frequently toward the end of cooking.
Use fresh tortillas: Fresh tortillas fold easier and won’t crack.
Shred the cheese yourself: Pre-shredded varieties often contain additives to prevent clumping, which makes them dry and harder to melt. If you can, shred your own cheese.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have any leftover air fryer chicken quesadillas, here’s how to store and reheat them:

Fridge: Once cooled, store the quesadillas in an airtight container for up to 3 days.
Freezer: For longer storage, wrap the quesadillas individually and freeze them for up to 2 months.
Reheating: Reheat them in the air fryer for 5-6 minutes at 350F, flipping halfway for the best results. You can cook them straight from frozen, adding a few more minutes.

Additional Recipes

If you loved this chicken quesadilla recipe, you’ll love these other crispy air fryer recipes:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make these without an air fryer?

Absolutely! Quesadillas can easily be made by using a skillet. Follow the same assembly instructions, then cook the quesadillas in the skillet over medium heat until they’re golden brown on each side.

What’s the best way to flip the quesadilla in the air fryer?

You can easily flip the quesadillas in the air fryer with a spatula or tongs. Just make sure to do it carefully so they don’t fall apart!

Can I add raw ingredients to the quesadilla?

It’s always best to cook ingredients before adding them to the quesadilla to ensure even cooking. I prefer cooked and shredded chicken, pork, beef, or refried beans.

Easy Air Fryer Quesadillas (in Less Than 10 Minutes)

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine Mexican

Keyword air fryer recipe, easy recipes, quesadilla

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 8

Total Time 13

Servings

Calories 351kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

1 tortilla corn or flour, more for additional quesadillas
¼ cup shredded chicken
½ cup mexican blend cheese taco blend, etc.
Optional toppings: guacamole sour cream, salsa, etc.

Instructions

Lay out each tortilla. On one half of the tortilla, evenly spread the chicken and cheese on one half of the tortilla.
Fold the tortilla over and place in the air fryer basket. Cook at 350F for 8 minutes or until the quesadillas are crisp and golden on the outside and melty on the inside. Don’t forget to flip half way through.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Quesadillas appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Instant Pot Shredded Chicken

Anna Kate — Mon, 12 Feb 2024 19:02:18 +0000

Instant Pot shredded chicken is a quick-to-make and versatile protein base that can be incorporated into a variety of meals throughout the week! It’s a meal-prep dream, ideal for adding to soups, salads, tacos, and more.

This pressure cooker recipe is a staple in my house for its sheer convenience and adaptability. Whether I’m planning a week of healthy eating or need a quick protein fix for unexpected guests, Instant Pot shredded chicken has proven to be my go-to savior time and time again.

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Effortless: Just set it and forget it! This hands-off recipe is unbelievably simple to make but can be used in virtually endless ways.
Versatile: From salads and casseroles to enchiladas and tacos, Instant Pot shredded chicken makes the perfect addition to your favorite recipes.
Meal-prep friendly: Prep the chicken on your day off, then enjoy it for the whole week ahead!

Easy Instant Pot Shredded Chicken

This Instant Pot shredded chicken recipe combines two of my favorite things — simplicity and versatility! It can serve as a quick and convenient protein base for tacos, casseroles, soups, stews, and more!

Using the Instant Pot results in tender, moist, chicken that’s easy to shred. Flavor-wise, it’s a blank canvas that absorbs garlic and onion powders, salt, and pepper like a sponge! You can also add your favorite seasonings depending on the meal you’ll be adding it to.

Ingredients For Instant Pot Shredded Chicken

Boneless skinless chicken breasts: Chicken breasts are my go-to since they cook quickly and shred easily. You can substitute them with chicken thighs for a juicier, more flavorful result, but you will need to adjust the cooking time accordingly.
Chicken stock: Adds depth and richness to the chicken. Vegetable broth or even water with a bit of bouillon can be used as well.
Kosher salt: Enhances the natural flavor of the chicken. Sea salt or regular table salt will work in a pinch.
Cracked black pepper: Provides a subtle heat and aroma. If you don’t have black pepper, try ground white pepper instead.
Garlic powder: Adds a savory, slightly toasty flavor. Fresh minced garlic or garlic salt with reduced added salt will also work.
Onion powder: Imparts a hint of sharpness and subtle sweetness. If you don’t have onion powder on hand, use extra garlic powder or dried onion flakes.
Optional seasonings: You can customize the seasonings based on the intended use of the chicken. Think taco seasoning, Italian herbs, curry powder, Cajun seasoning, etc.

How To Cook Shredded Chicken In The Instant Pot

Step 1: Prep The Chicken

Add the chicken, broth, and seasonings to your Instant Pot. Give everything a gentle stir to make sure the chicken is evenly coated with the seasonings. If you’re using any optional herbs or spices, add them at this stage as well.

Step 2: Pressure Cook The Chicken

Lock the lid, make sure the valve is set to “seal,” and let the Instant Pot work its magic for 10 minutes on high pressure.

Once the timer goes off, give the Instant Pot 5 more minutes to naturally release the pressure before switching the valve to “release.”

Step 3: Shred & Serve

Take out the chicken, shred it with two forks, and you’re done! From here, you can use it right away or store it to use in recipes throughout the week.

How To Use Instant Pot Shredded Chicken

With so many ways to use Instant Pot shredded chicken, I’ve compiled a list to spark your creativity:

Chicken tacos: Use it as a filling for tacos, topped with fresh salsa and guacamole.
Creamy chicken pasta: Stir it into your favorite creamy pasta sauce for a hearty meal.
Chicken salad: Mix it with greens, veggies, and a vinaigrette for a healthy salad.
Quesadillas: Serve it in tortillas with cheese to make protein-packed air fryer quesadillas.
Chicken soup: Add some to homemade or store-bought chicken soup for extra protein.
BBQ chicken pizza: Top pizza dough with BBQ sauce, chicken, onions, and cheese.
Chicken enchiladas: Roll the chicken in tortillas with sauce and top them with cheese.
Buffalo chicken dip: Mix the chicken with buffalo sauce and cream cheese.
Chicken sandwich: Pile it onto buns with lettuce, tomato, and your favorite sauce.
Chicken casserole: Layer it with vegetables and creamy sauce, then bake until bubbly.

Seasoning Ideas

Now that you know how to cook shredded chicken in the Instant Pot, test out some of these seasonings to see what you like best:

Spicy: Add chili powder and cayenne pepper for a kick.
BBQ: Mix in your favorite BBQ sauce after cooking.
Curry: Add curry powder and a bit of coconut milk.
Mexican: Use taco seasoning for a Tex-Mex twist.
Herbaceous: Mix in rosemary, thyme, and sage for an aromatic option.
Cajun: Try mixing in Cajun or Creole seasoning for a spicy Southern flavor.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Use quality chicken: Opt for fresh, high-quality grass-fed chicken for the best results.
Natural pressure release: Let the Instant Pot naturally release pressure for about 5-10 minutes to give you juicier chicken.
Shred while warm: Shred the chicken while it’s still warm for easier handling.
Adjust the liquid: If the chicken is too dry, you can add a bit more broth after shredding.

What To Do With Leftovers

This recipe is meant for leftovers! Just follow these simple storage and reheating tips:

Fridge: Once cooled, store the chicken in an airtight container for up to 4 days.
Freezer: You can freeze it in single-serving freezer bags for up to 3 months.
Reheating: Gently reheat the chicken in the microwave or on the stovetop, adding a splash of broth or oil if needed.
Prep ahead: Instant Pot shredded chicken is the perfect meal prep recipe! Just shred and divide it into portions to add to meals throughout the week.

Additional Recipes

If you like chicken as much as I do, here are some more of my favorite chicken recipes to try:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use frozen chicken?

Yes, you can use frozen chicken, but you will have to increase the cooking time to about 12-15 minutes.

Can I make this recipe in a slow cooker?

Absolutely! To make this recipe in a slow cooker, just cook on low for 6-8 hours or high for 3-4 hours.

How do I know when the chicken is done?

You’ll know the chicken is done when it has reached an internal temperature of 165F and can be easily shredded.

Instant Pot Shredded Chicken

Course Main Course

Cuisine American

Keyword Chicken, easy recipes, meal prep, pressure cooker

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 15

Total Time 20

Servings

Calories 189kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Pressure Cooker

Ingredients

2 to 3 pounds boneless skinless chicken breasts thawed
1 cup chicken stock or water
1 teaspoon kosher salt
½ teaspoon black pepper
½ teaspoon garlic powder
½ teaspoon onion powder
Other seasoning as desired optional

Instructions

Place the chicken, broth, and seasonings into your pressure cooker. Gently stir to combine.
Add the lid and pressure cook on high for 10 minutes (make sure the valve is flipped to “seal”!). Allow for a natural release for 5 minutes, then release the remaining pressure by flipping the valve to “release”.
Remove the chicken and shred with forks. Now, you can store it to use for recipes throughout the week or freeze for later.

Nutrition

The post Instant Pot Shredded Chicken appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Tater Tots

Anna Kate — Tue, 24 Oct 2023 20:29:31 +0000

Whip up a batch of air fryer tater tots and bring back childhood memories with every crispy, crunchy bite. Forget soggy, half-baked tots from your oven! With the air fryer, they turn out deliciously golden every time. This speedy and straightforward method guarantees crowd-pleasing results.

It’s no secret that I use my air fryer for virtually everything these days. From air fryer frozen broccoli to air fryer buffalo wings, this versatile appliance has revolutionized my cooking routine.

Tater tots have always been one of my favorite comfort foods. With the air fryer, I can have them ready in no time at all. I don’t know how I didn’t think of this sooner!

Why I Love This Recipe

Quick: Air fryer tater tots are ready in less than 20 minutes, making this recipe something you can always have on hand when you’re running short on time or creativity.
Crispy: The air fryer creates an irresistibly crunchy and perfectly golden crust. It really doesn’t compare to baking them in the oven.
Easy: Open a bag and pop the frozen tots into the preheated air fryer. It doesn’t get much easier than that!

Crispy Air Fryer Tater Tots

Tater tots are a classic American food item. If you haven’t heard of them, you’ve likely been living under a rock! Originally created in the 1950s by the Ore-Ida company as a way to utilize leftover bits of cut-up potatoes, they’ve since become a beloved side dish nationwide.

These tiny nuggets of potato are perfectly crispy on the outside with a fluffy, tender interior. The air frying technique results in a superior crunch that oven-baking simply can’t match.

While they’re excellent on their own, they also pair well with a variety of seasonings, like garlic, paprika, or Italian herbs, for added flavor. Serve them hot out of the air fryer with ketchup or your favorite dipping sauce!

Ingredients For Air Fryer Tater Tots

Frozen tater tots: Use your favorite brand, but I usually opt for Ore-Ida or McCain. If you can’t find frozen tots, you could also use frozen hash browns or potato croquettes.
Cooking spray: I prefer avocado oil for air-frying, but any neutral vegetable oil with a high smoke point, like canola or peanut, will work.
Salt: Helps to bring out the natural flavors of the potatoes. You can also use seasoned salt for a spin on the classic tater tots flavor profile.
Other seasonings: This is where you can get creative! Try garlic powder, onion powder, taco seasoning, cracked black pepper, dried herbs, or even some chili powder for a kick.

How to Make Air Fryer Tater Tots

Step 1: Preheat And Prep

Start by preheating your air fryer to 400ºF. While it’s heating, add your tater tots and coat them with some avocado oil cooking spray.

Step 2: Season The Tots

Next, season your tots as desired and toss them to ensure they’re evenly coated. The beauty of this step is that you can tailor the flavor to your own preferences.

Step 3: Air Fry The Tater Tots

Finally, let your tater tots cook for 15 minutes, tossing every 5-8 minutes to ensure they brown evenly on each side. If you prefer extra crispy tots, feel free to leave them in the air fryer for a bit longer.

How To Serve Tater Tots

Tater tots in the air fryer are a versatile side dish that pairs well with burgers, hot dogs, or even chicken breasts. They’re also the perfect size for skewering, making them a fun addition to a party spread.

And if you’re a dip person like me, serve them alongside ketchup, or change things up with homemade aioli or Alabama white BBQ sauce. You can even experiment with some fun recipes, like tater tots nachos or a tater tots casserole.

Recipe Variations

Cheesy: Toss in Parmesan and garlic powder before cooking for a garlicky and cheesy twist.
Spicy: Add some Cajun or cayenne powder for a spicy kick.
Mexican: Sprinkle with ancho chile powder and a squeeze of lime for a Mexican-inspired flavor.
Indian-inspired: Toss your tater tots in some curry powder, then serve them with a side of chutney for dipping.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Preheat: Preheat your air fryer before adding the tater tots for the crispiest results.
Don’t overcrowd: Don’t overload the air fryer. If you need, cook the tots in batches so they air fry in a single layer.
Flip the tots: Flip the tater tots throughout to ensure they cook evenly on all sides.
Oil: Make sure to coat the tots well with cooking spray for the best crunch. If you don’t have spray, you can toss them in oil instead.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you find yourself with leftover tater tots, follow these simple storage and reheating tips:

Fridge: Once your tater tots have cooled, store any leftovers in a sealed container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
Freezer: You can actually refreeze your tater tots if you’re not going to eat them within a few days. Just add them back into a freezer-safe bag and store them for up to a month.
Reheating: Reheat leftovers in the air fryer at 400F for a few minutes until hot and crispy. Remember to toss them a few times throughout.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoy air fryer recipes as much as I do, then you’ll love making these recipes:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use any type of frozen potato product for this recipe?

Absolutely! Instead of tater tots, you can cook fries, wedges, croquettes, or hash browns in the air fryer. Just keep in mind that each of these may take a different amount of time to cook, so always refer to the package instructions.

Do tater tots need to be thawed before cooking them in the air fryer?

No! The best part about tater tots is that you can just pop them in the air fryer right out of the bag. The cold ensures they retain their shape while achieving an ultra-crispy crust and fluffy interior.

Can I make tater tots in the oven if I don’t have an air fryer?

Of course! If you don’t have an air fryer you can still achieve a similar level of crispiness. Just cook them at a higher temperature in the oven. I suggest 425F for about 20 minutes, flipping halfway. Just keep a close eye on them to avoid burning.

Crispy Air Fryer Tater Tots

Whip up a batch of air fryer tater tots and bring back childhood memories with every crispy, crunchy bite. Forget soggy, half-baked tots from your oven! With the air fryer, they turn out deliciously golden every time.

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Side Dish Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword potato dishes, snack, tater tots

Cook Time 15

Servings

Calories 141kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

16 ounces frozen tater tots
cooking spray I use avocado oil bc of high smoke point
salt
Other seasoning as desired

Instructions

Preheat air fryer to 400ºF. Add the tots to the air fryer, and coat with cooking spray.
Season as desired and toss to coat.
Cook for 15 minutes on 400ºF, tossing every 5-8 minutes so the tots brown evenly. Continue cooking for longer for crispier tots.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Tater Tots appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Baked Ravioli

Anna Kate — Tue, 17 Oct 2023 10:37:00 +0000

Baked ravioli is an absolute game-changer for busy nights! Dig into layers of cheesy pasta and juicy tomato sauce without the tedious layering work traditional lasagna requires. It’s a quick and easy dish to make when you’re not in the mood to spend hours in the kitchen!

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Simple to make: Just add the ingredients to a baking dish and heat it up in the oven.
Cheesy: With cheese-stuffed ravioli, mozzarella, and Parmesan, this ravioli casserole is for cheese lovers only!
Versatile: You can add meat, like ground sausage or beef, to bulk it up, or keep your baked ravioli vegetarian with just cheese and tomato sauce.
Crowd-pleaser: This baked ravioli recipe is always a hit at family dinners and potlucks.

What Is Baked Ravioli?

This baked ravioli recipe is a simplified version of the classic Italian dish that normally takes an entire afternoon to make. I like to call it a lazy lasagna with ravioli since it’s way easier and quicker to whip together, even on weekdays!

I use ravioli as a hack to skip the intricate layering process typically required in traditional lasagna making. Simply combine vibrant tomato sauce, tender pasta, and gooey cheese in a dish, then bake it until bubbly and golden brown.

Serve this dish with a side of crusty bread, garlic knots, Caprese salad, or roasted veggies for the ultimate spread. I guarantee you’ll be making this recipe on repeat!

Ingredients For Baked Ravioli

Marinara sauce: Adds a tangy, juicy element to balance the richness of the cheese. You can use store-bought or homemade spaghetti sauce for this recipe.
Cheese ravioli: I think cheese ravioli is the perfect centerpiece of this ravioli casserole, but you can experiment with spinach or meat-filled ravioli for a twist.
Mozzarella: Provides a mild, creamy taste and an unmatched melting ability. Alternatively, you can try provolone or mild white cheddar.
Parmesan: Freshly grated Parmesan adds a sharp, nutty flavor that truly elevates this baked ravioli recipe. If you don’t have Parmesan, opt for Asiago or Pecorino Romano.
Ground meat: Although optional, you can add ground beef or Italian sausage for more texture and flavor throughout the casserole.

How To Make Baked Ravioli

Step 1: Preheat & Prep

Heat up your oven, then grab out a 9×13 baking dish and give it a quick grease. Trust me, you won’t want any of that ravioli goodness to stick to the pan.

Step 2: Layer The Ingredients

Add a splash of marinara sauce to the base of your casserole dish. This provides another layer of non-stick insurance! Lay down the frozen ravioli pieces, ensuring they snugly fit in one layer.

Cover them in more sauce, then sprinkle them with mozzarella. If you’re feeling like something a little more hearty, toss in browned ground beef or Italian sausage, then repeat the whole process until the ingredients are gone.

Step 3: Bake The Casserole

After your layers are stacked, garnish the top with Parmesan for a crispy, golden layer. Cover your ravioli casserole with foil and let it bake at 400F. After 30 minutes, uncover it and keep it in the oven until the top is lightly browned and bubbly.

What To Serve With A Ravioli Casserole

This lazy lasagna with ravioli pairs well with virtually any Italian-style side dish. Try serving yours with some of these options:

Garlic bread
Caprese salad
Italian chopped salad
Roasted carrots or broccoli
Bruschetta

Recipe Variations

White sauce: Swap some or all of the marinara with bechamel sauce for a rich flavor.
Spicy: Mix in red pepper flakes and spicy Italian sausage.
Veggies: Add spinach, bell peppers, or mushrooms for extra nutritional value.
Four cheese: Add dollops of ricotta to create an ultra-cheesy version.
Seafood: Include shrimp or crab meat for a seafood-baked ravioli casserole.
Pesto: Replace some marinara with green pesto for an herbaceous take.
Meatballs: Add mini meatballs between layers instead of ground meat.
Tortellini: Instead of ravioli, swap in your favorite flavor and color of tortellini.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Even layering: Evenly disperse the tomato sauce, ravioli, and cheese for consistent baking and flavor.
Don’t overfill the dish: Don’t overfill the baking dish as it can quickly bubble over.
Check the dish: Check the dish frequently toward the end of baking. Since every oven is different, the cooking time may vary slightly.
Use quality ingredients: Whether store-bought or homemade, use a quality marinara sauce in this baked ravioli recipe. It makes a world of difference in the final product.
Grate your cheese: Use block cheese and grate it yourself for the best results.
Rest before serving: Let the ravioli casserole rest for 10 minutes before slicing it.

What To Do With Leftovers

When it comes to this lazy lasagna with ravioli, nothing is better than leftovers! Follow these simple steps to keep your dish fresh for longer:

Fridge: Once fully cooled, store any leftover ravioli casserole in an airtight container for up to 3-4 days in the refrigerator.
Freezer: For longer storage, you can freeze your baked ravioli recipe in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag for up to 3-4 months.
Reheating: You can microwave or oven-bake leftovers until hot and bubbly again. For the oven method, heat it at 350F for about 10-12 minutes until warmed through. Make sure you keep the dish covered with foil to ensure it doesn’t dry out. In the microwave, heat it for 1-2 minutes on medium power until warmed through.
Prep ahead: To save time on the day of cooking, assemble the ravioli casserole the day before, refrigerate it, and bake it just before serving.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed this baked ravioli recipe, take a peek at some more comforting dishes like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use fresh ravioli?

If you’re using fresh ravioli, that’s absolutely fine! You’ll just need to reduce the baking time a bit to avoid overcooking them.

Is it necessary to cover the casserole with foil?

Covering this ravioli casserole with foil is highly recommended. It ensures even cooking and prevents the top from burning or drying out too quickly.

How do I know when it’s fully baked?

The best indicator for fully baked ravioli is a bubbly cheese top. The ravioli underneath should be tender to the bite.

Easy Baked Ravioli Casserole

Course Main Course

Cuisine American, Italian

Keyword baked pasta, casserole, easy recipes, ravioli, Weeknight Meal

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 45

Total Time 55

Calories 3298kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

24 ounces Marinara or pasta sauce plug in homemade spaghetti sauce here
24 ounces cheese ravioli frozen
2 cups mozzarella cheese shredded
½ cup Parmesan Cheese shredded
Optional: one pound of browned ground beef or sausage.

Instructions

Preheat your oven to 400 degrees and grease a 9×13 baking dish.
Add a thin layer (about ¼ cup) of the marinara sauce on to the bottom of the pan. (this prevents pasta from sticking)
Arrange half the frozen ravioli in a single layer on top of the sauce.
Top with half of the remaining sauce and about a cup of the mozzarella cheese.
Repeat the layers: ravioli, sauce, cheese. Add browned meat to the rotation as desired.
Finish with the remaining sauce and cheese. Sprinkle with shredded parmesan cheese.
Cover with aluminum foil and bake for 30 minutes. Remove the foil and bake for another 15 minutes or until the cheese has browned slightly.
Serve with a salad and bread as desired!

Nutrition

The post Baked Ravioli appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Taco Soup

Anna Kate — Mon, 16 Oct 2023 21:45:40 +0000

Crock pot taco soup is the ultimate no-fuss Tex-Mex comfort food! It brings together the best of two worlds — the hearty richness of chili and the spicy vibrance of tacos. It’s a true game-changer for those looking for a mouthwatering, easy-to-make dish!

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Effortless: This original taco soup recipe is one of the simplest meals to make! Just brown the beef, add the rest of the ingredients, and simmer until it’s bubbling.
Crowd-pleaser: This recipe is perfect for game days, large family gatherings, potlucks, or any occasion where you need to feed a crowd.
Comforting: Nothing beats the warmth and satisfaction of a bowl of taco soup, especially on cool fall or winter evenings.

What is taco soup?

Taco soup is an easy, hands-off recipe that’s extremely popular in the Southern United States. Taking inspiration from both chili and tacos, it’s packed with hearty, spicy, tangy, and rich flavors that will keep you full and satisfied for hours!

It showcases ingredients like ground beef, two kinds of beans, corn, Rotel tomatoes, and taco seasoning. Everything is slow-cooked in the Crockpot until the flavors meld together, creating a recipe the whole family will love!

For the best eating experience, serve your beef taco soup hot, garnished with shredded cheese, green onions, cilantro, corn chips, and a dollop of sour cream.

Ingredients For Taco Soup

Ranch seasoning: Adds a creamy, tangy, and herbaceous flavor. Use a store-bought option for more convenience, or try making your own with a mix of dried parsley, dill, onion powder, and garlic powder if needed.
Taco seasoning: Gives the soup its spicy kick! Again, this can be homemade or store-bought. For a homemade mix, use chili powder, cumin, paprika, and garlic powder.
Beans: I like to add black beans and kidney beans for a hearty texture. Both canned beans and home-cooked beans will work. If you don’t have black or kidney beans, try replacing them with other types like pinto or navy beans.
Sweet corn: Offers bursts of juicy sweetness to balance the spices of this crock pot taco soup. Frozen corn also makes a good substitute.
Diced tomatoes: Provides a juicy, tangy base. To create a smokier flavor, substitute regular diced tomatoes with fire-roasted diced tomatoes.
Beef broth: Deepens the rich, meaty flavor of the soup. For a lighter flavor, replace the beef broth with chicken or vegetable broth instead.
Rotel tomatoes: Add zest and a bit of heat. Make sure to double-check the can since there are different spice levels of Rotel tomatoes. If you can’t find them, use extra diced tomatoes with canned diced green chilies.
Ground beef: Provides richness and a hearty texture. I prefer to use 80/20 ground beef for the best results, but you can use 90/10 for a leaner flavor.

How To Make Beef Taco Soup

Step 1: Brown The Beef

Start off by browning your ground beef in a large skillet. Don’t forget to pour off any extra grease as it cooks — we want flavor, not a grease fest! Once it’s browned, add it to the Crockpot.

Step 2: Prepare The Rest

Drain and rinse the kidney beans and black beans in a colander. Additionally, strain the sweet corn. Dump everything into your Crockpot with the beef, including the ranch and taco seasoning.

Step 3: Bring It All Together

Give the mixture a good stir, then let it simmer for a few hours until your kitchen smells like crock pot taco soup heaven! Serve it with your favorite toppings and garnishes.

What To Serve With Crock Pot Taco Soup

Now that you know how to make taco soup, try customizing your bowl with some of my favorite toppings and sides like these:

Corn chips: For the perfect textural balance, serve this beef taco soup with crunchy corn chips.
Cheese: Shredded cheese melts into the hot soup, creating a gooey, melty consistency.
Sour cream: For a creamy, cooling element, add a dollop of sour cream on top.
Avocado: Sliced avocados add a buttery richness that complements the spicy soup.
Tortillas: Warm, soft tortillas or crispy tortilla strips make a great side for dipping.

Recipe Variations

Protein swap: Replace ground beef with ground turkey, pork, or chicken.
Veggies: Add bell peppers, mushrooms, zucchini, or carrots for a colorful twist.
Creamy: For a creamier version, stir in some cream cheese.
Extra spicy: Add a dash of hot sauce or more diced jalapeños for extra heat.
Pasta taco soup: Stir in some pasta for a heartier version of this crock pot taco soup.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Browning: Make sure you thoroughly brown the beef for a richer taco soup flavor.
Heat level: Adjust the heat by adding or reducing the amount of taco seasoning and Rotel tomatoes. For a mild version, replace the Rotel tomatoes with regular diced tomatoes and make your own taco seasoning to control the spice.
Consistency: If your crock pot taco soup is too thick, add more broth to reach your desired consistency.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have leftovers or want to make taco soup ahead of time, just follow these simple storage instructions:

Fridge: Once cooled, store beef taco soup in an airtight container for up to 3-4 days.
Freezer: For longer storage, freeze crock pot taco soup in freezer-safe containers or bags for up to 2-3 months. I suggest portioning them in single-serving containers for easier reheating.
Reheating: Reheat your taco soup on the stovetop over medium heat or in the microwave until warm.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed this beef taco soup recipe, here are a few more quick and easy dinner recipes:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this soup on the stovetop?

Absolutely! To make it on the stovetop, just brown the beef, then add it to a stockpot with the rest. Simmer everything on low for about an hour.

Is this taco soup recipe spicy?

Not necessarily! The spiciness depends on the Rotel tomatoes and taco seasoning used, both of which you can adjust to your preference.

Easy Crock Pot Taco Soup

Course Dinner Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword crockpot, easy dinner, slow cooker, soup

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 5

Total Time 5 10

Servings servings

Calories 366kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Crock-Pot

Ingredients

1 ounce ranch seasoning packet
1 ounce taco seasoning packet
15 ounces black beans
15 ounces kidney beans
15 ounces sweet corn
15 ounces diced tomatoes
15 ounces beef broth
15 ounces Rotel tomatoes
1 pound ground beef

Instructions

In a large skillet, brown ground beef and pour off any excess grease. Add to crock pot.
In a colander, drain and rinse kidney beans and black beans.
To the same colander, strain sweet corn.
Add beans and corn to the crock pot. Then, add the (undrained) cans of tomatoes and beef broth to the crock pot.
Stir in Ranch and Taco seasoning packets. Stir.
Simmer for 3-5 hours or until bubbling.
Serve with corn chips, shredded cheese, and sour cream if desired.

Notes

Can use homemade ranch and taco seasoning if desired.
Try seasoned canned tomatoes for additional flavor. Examples: fire roasted tomatoes, with green chillies, salsa style, hot, spicy, etc.
Stretch this recipe by adding an extra can of broth.

Nutrition

The post Taco Soup appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Salmon Bites

Anna Kate — Wed, 06 Sep 2023 10:00:00 +0000

These air fryer salmon bites are perfect for when you’re craving a quick, simple, and healthy meal. Use this versatile protein for making sushi bowls, serving with fresh vegetables, or bulking up your favorite salads. Customize the seasonings to suit your taste, and enjoy a dish that’s ready in minutes!

I’ve always loved salmon, so when I discovered salmon in the air fryer, I knew it was going to be a game-changer! This dish has now become my go-to for busy weeknights and meal prepping.

Just like my other air fryer recipes, it’s virtually all hands-off and so simple to prepare! You can change up the seasonings from recipe to recipe to make it feel different each time. Some of my favorite flavor combinations include lemon pepper and Old Bay.

Why I Love This Recipe

Perfect for meal prep: Make a double or triple batch of these air fryer salmon bites for easy lunches and dinners throughout the week.
Quick: Air frying the salmon bites takes just 5-6 minutes! It’s the perfect option when you’re short on time.
Healthy: Salmon is rich in omega-3 fatty acids. It’s a great source of protein to include in your weekly meal plan.
Versatile: Pair your air fryer salmon bites with a variety of sides for endless meal options. Think sushi bowls, salads, rice, or air fryer broccoli.

What Are Air Fryer Salmon Bites?

Air fryer salmon bites are a modern twist on a classic dish, with the convenience of an air fryer making it faster and healthier. If you’re looking for a quick, nutritious, and flavor-packed meal, this recipe is the answer!

The bites are tender with a crispy exterior thanks to the air frying process. This simple technique results in a perfectly moist and flaky fish with a golden-brown color. I don’t know what I ever did before I owned this kitchen appliance!

You can enjoy air fryer salmon bites with dip for an appetizer, serve them as part of a spread at a potluck, or pair them alongside roasted vegetables or a salad. You can even include them as part of a sushi or poke bowl.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Salmon Bites

Salmon: Salmon provides a rich, buttery flavor. You can use any type of salmon you prefer. Atlantic salmon is the most widely available and inexpensive option, but I find sockeye and King salmon (both wild-caught) are the firmest and most flavorful choices.
Avocado oil: This mild, heart-healthy oil helps the seasonings stick to the salmon. You can also use olive oil or any neutral-flavored vegetable oil.
Seasonings: Customize the flavor of your salmon bites by using your favorite spice blends. Some options include lemon pepper, garlic powder, onion powder, Old Bay, Cajun seasoning, blackened seasoning, or even a simple mix of salt and pepper.

How To Make Salmon In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Prepare The Salmon

You can use skinless or skin-on salmon filets. If you’re using a skin-on filet, remove the skin by carefully sliding a sharp knife between the skin and the flesh. Then, cut the salmon into 1-inch uniform cubes.

Here is my full tutorial on how to remove salmon skin.

Step 2: Season & Air Fry The Salmon Bites

Once the salmon bites are cubed, preheat your air fryer to 400°F. In a large bowl, toss the salmon with avocado oil and your preferred seasonings. Spread the seasoned salmon bites in a single layer in the air fryer basket, and cook them for 5-6 minutes or until opaque and flaky.

What To Serve With Air Fryer Salmon Bites

Garnish your air fryer salmon recipe with a squeeze of lemon, a sprinkle of fresh herbs, or a drizzle of your favorite sauce.

Enjoy these bites by themselves or with a side of broccoli, a fresh Caprese salad, rice, or mashed potatoes. You can also use them as a topping for sushi bowls and poke bowls.

Recipe Variations

Asian-inspired: Use a teriyaki or soy-ginger marinade for an Asian-inspired flavor.
Mediterranean: Season the bites with garlic, lemon, and oregano.
Spicy: Add a touch of Sriracha or red pepper flakes for a spicy kick.
Honey-mustard: Toss the salmon bites in a store-bought or homemade honey-mustard sauce.
Herb-crusted: Coat the salmon in a mixture of fresh herbs and breadcrumbs.
BBQ: Toss the salmon bites in your favorite BBQ sauce before cooking them.
Pesto: Mix the salmon bites with basil pesto for a vibrant and herbaceous finish.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Quality salmon: Use fresh, high-quality salmon for the best flavor and texture.
Remove bones: Look for and remove any bones from the salmon before cutting it into cubes.
Pat dry: Pat the salmon dry before cutting and seasoning it to ensure an even coating.
Preheat: Preheat the air fryer for 5 minutes so the salmon bites cook evenly.
Don’t overcrowd: Make sure the salmon bites are in a single layer and not overlapping each other to prevent steaming them, resulting in a soggy texture.
Thermometer: Use a meat thermometer to check for doneness. You want to aim for an internal temperature of 135°F for salmon.
Adjust the cooking time: You may need to cook the salmon bites for more or less time based on the thickness of your cubes.
Serve immediately: Serve salmon in the air fryer right away for the best texture.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have leftover air fryer salmon bites, follow these simple storage and reheating tips:

Fridge: Store leftover air fryer salmon bites in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. Just make sure they’re completely cooled first.
Freezer: Wrap the cooled salmon bites in plastic wrap or aluminum foil and place them in a freezer-safe container. You can store them for up to 3 months this way.
Reheating: Reheat the salmon bites in the air fryer at 350°F for 2-3 minutes, or until they are warmed through to your liking.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed this air fryer salmon recipe, take a peek at some more of my favorite appetizers and snacks like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use frozen salmon for this recipe?

Yes, but be sure to thaw the salmon completely and pat it dry before cutting and seasoning it.

How can I tell when the salmon bites are done?

It’s best to use a meat thermometer to be sure the internal temperature reaches 135°F. If you don’t have one, the salmon bites should appear opaque and flaky.

Can I use other types of fish for this recipe?

You can use other firm, flaky fish, like halibut or cod, but the cooking time, taste, and texture will vary based on the type of fish.

Can I cook the salmon bites in a conventional oven?

Absolutely! If you don’t own an air fryer, you can bake the salmon bites at 425°F for 8-10 minutes, or until opaque and flaky.

Can I leave the skin on for this recipe?

It’s best to remove the skin for a better texture and more even cooking.

Quick and Easy Air Fryer Salmon Bites

These air fryer salmon bites are perfect for when you're craving a quick, simple, and healthy meal. Use this versatile protein for making sushi bowls, serving with fresh vegetables, or bulking up your favorite salads. Customize the seasonings to suit your taste, and enjoy a dish that's ready in minutes!

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer recipe, easy dinner, salmon, Seafood

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 6

Total Time 16

Servings people

Calories 60kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

8 ounces salmon skin removed
1 teaspoon Avocado oil
Seasonings of your choice

Instructions

#1 – Remove Salmon Skin

Using a sharp knife, make a shallow cut between the skin and the flesh of the salmon (about an inch in).
Then, carefully slide the knife along the length of the fillet at an angle. Keep the blade as close to the skin as possible. Gently pull the skin away as continue to slide the knife between the skin and the flesh.

#2 Prepare + Cook Salmon

Preheat air fryer to 400° F.
Cut salmon into 1 inch uniform cubes and place in a large bowl. Remove any stray bones you find.
Drizzle salmon with avocado oil. Toss with seasoning to coat.
Spread salmon evenly in one layer in air fryer basket.
Cook at 400° F for 5-6 minutes or until salmon is cooked to desired doneness. (optimal temperature is 135)

Notes

Seasoning Ideas:

Lemon Pepper Seasoning
Salt, Pepper, Garlic Powder, Onion Powder
Classic mix of salt and pepper
Blackened Seasoning
Old Bay/cajun seasoning

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Salmon Bites appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Hot Dogs

Anna Kate — Mon, 04 Sep 2023 19:13:32 +0000

Air fryer hot dogs achieve that nostalgic taste and texture everyone loves without the need to fire up the grill! This simple, fuss-free method results in juicy hot dogs in a matter of minutes. They’re perfect for days when you need a quick, comforting, and satisfying meal.

Growing up, I used to love spending summer evenings with my family gathered around the grill or campfire, and a juicy hot dog with a slightly charred skin was one of my favorites! Nowadays, I don’t always want to go through the trouble of starting up my grill, but I definitely don’t want any boring old boiled hot dogs.

That’s where making hot dogs in the air fryer comes in! They deliver the same great taste as the grill without the hassle of outdoor cooking. Whether you’re making your kids a quick snack or cooking up one for yourself, you won’t be able to get enough of these air fryer hot dogs!

Why I Love This Recipe

Simple: Just throw the hot dogs in the air fryer and push start! Virtually anyone can make this straightforward recipe, but it turns out unbelievably delicious.
Quick: It takes all of 5 minutes to make the entire recipe, including toasting the buns.
Delicious: Using the air fryer results in hot dogs with a slightly crispy exterior and a tender, juicy interior. Plus, it crisps up the buns perfectly!
Customizable: Create your perfect hot dog by switching up the sausage flavors, adding your favorite condiments, or using gluten-free buns if you have allergies.

Simple Air Fryer Hot Dogs

I think we can all agree that hot dogs have become an iconic item at summer cookouts, camping trips, sporting events, and backyard get-togethers. But, all of those situations require you to be outside, own a grill, or have a campfire, and that’s just not a possibility year-round for a lot of us!

With the invention of this all-purpose appliance, you can now enjoy the taste and texture of perfectly cooked hot dogs in the air fryer in minutes, no matter what time of year it is! That also means easier cleanup, which is always a win in my books.

Serve air fryer hot dogs with your choice of condiments, like ketchup, mustard, relish, and sauerkraut for a fun, customizable, and nostalgic meal the whole family will love.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Hot Dogs

Hot dog buns: You can use traditional hot dog buns, or try whole wheat buns for a heartier flavor. If you have gluten sensitivities, opt for your favorite gluten-free brand. For a low-carb option, swap out the bun for a lettuce wrap.
Hot dogs: Since they are the main ingredient, it’s essential to pick high-quality hot dogs. Some good options include Applegate Farms, Hebrew National, Sabrett, Niman Ranch, and Ball Park. Alternatively, try turkey, chicken, or veggie dogs as a substitute.

How to Air Fry Hot Dogs

Step 1: Toast the buns

Preheat your air fryer to 400 degrees F, then place the hot dog buns in a single layer in the basket. Toast them for about 2 minutes, or until they are browned to your liking. Remove them from the air fryer and set them aside while you cook the hot dogs.

Step 2: Cook the hot dogs

Place the hot dogs in the air fryer basket in a single layer. Cook them for 3 minutes, or until they are crisped to your liking. For an even better texture, make shallow diagonal slits on the hot dogs before air-frying them.

Step 3: Assemble and serve

When the hot dogs are nice and crispy, serve them inside toasted buns with your favorite condiments and sides!

What To Serve With Air Fryer Hot Dogs

You can dress air fryer hot dogs with classic condiments like ketchup, mustard, and relish. To get a little more creative, try adding toppings like chili, shredded cheese, chopped onions, sauerkraut, or even guacamole.

Make your hot dogs a full meal deal by serving them alongside your favorite side dishes like coleslaw, pasta salad, potato salad, corn on the cob, or baked beans.

Recipe Variations

Chili cheese dogs: Top with chili and shredded cheese for a loaded hot dog.
New York style: Add tangy sauerkraut and spicy brown mustard.
Tex-Mex: Create a Tex-Mex flavor with guacamole, salsa, and pickled jalapeños.
BBQ: Drizzle on your favorite barbecue sauce and sprinkle crispy onions on top.
Buffalo: Serve your hot dog with Buffalo sauce and crumbled blue cheese.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Preheat: Preheat the air fryer for 3-5 minutes for the most even cooking.
Avoid overcrowding: Make sure the hot dogs have room in the basket and aren’t overcrowded. You can cook the hot dogs in batches if you need to.
Toast the buns: Remember to toast the buns for extra flavor and texture.
Cooking time: If you’re using frozen or pre-cooked hot dogs, just be mindful of the cooking times as you may need to adjust them.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have leftover air fryer hot dogs, follow these storage and reheating tips:

Fridge: Store the cooled hot dogs in an airtight container for up to 3-4 days.
Freezer: Once completely cooled, wrap each hot dog in plastic wrap and store them in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months.
Reheating: Reheat the hot dogs in the air fryer at 350 degrees F for 2-3 minutes, or until they’re heated through. Toast the buns separately.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoy air fryer hot dogs as much as I do, here are a few more quick and hassle-free recipes to try in this handy kitchen gadget:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I cook frozen hot dogs in the air fryer?

Yes, but you may need to increase the cooking time accordingly.

Can I cook the hot dogs and buns at the same time?

It’s best to cook the hot dogs and buns separately to ensure optimal cooking of the hot dogs and a crispy toast of the buns.

How do I clean my air fryer after cooking hot dogs?

To clean your air fryer, let it cool, then remove the basket and wipe it clean it a damp cloth or sponge. You can also wipe it with a slice of lemon to remove any odors.

Air Fryer Hot Dogs

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Dinner Recipes, Main Course

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer recipe, easy recipes, hot dogs, quick recipe

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 5

Total Time 10

Servings people

Calories 230kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

4 hot dog buns
4 hot dogs
Your favorite condiments!

Instructions

Preheat an air fryer to 400 degrees F.
Place buns in a single layer in the air fryer basket; cook in the preheated air fryer until toasted, about 2 minutes. Remove buns to a plate.
Place hot dogs in a single layer in the air fryer basket; cook for 3 minutes.
Serve hot dogs in toasted buns with desired condiments.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Hot Dogs appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Sherbet Punch Recipe

Anna Kate — Mon, 04 Sep 2023 18:48:27 +0000

This sherbet punch recipe is an old-school Southern classic, perfect for the special occasions in your life. Filled with fizzy lemon-lime soda and creamy sherbet, it’s sweet, tangy, and creamy. I promise it will have everyone coming back for seconds and thirds!

If you’re not familiar with Southern recipes, like Southern pear salad and pineapple casserole, the ingredients might seem unusual, but just trust me here. This recipe has stood the test of time!

It’s simple, fun, and oddly addicting. Just grab your two ingredients and a punch bowl, and you’re set for a great night with friends and family!

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Simple: Lime punch with sherbet comes together in less than 5 minutes, making it an easy last-minute addition to any dinner party menu or event.
Versatile: From birthdays to holidays, this recipe can be enjoyed anywhere. Plus, with the ability to add alcohol, it’s sure to be a hit with both kids and adults!
Refreshing: The combination of zesty lemon-lime soda and smooth sherbet creates a cool, rejuvenating drink perfect for hot days.
Budget-friendly: Using just two main ingredients, this punch doesn’t break the bank yet it still delivers big on flavor and festivity.

Southern Sherbet Punch Recipe

This sherbet punch recipe isn’t just a drink, it’s a nostalgic walk down memory lane for many folks in the South. Made with zesty lemon-lime soda and swirled with creamy lime sherbet, it’s both tangy and sweet.

Once you mix the two together, something magic happens — a frothy, bubbly treat that’s guaranteed to be the life of the party! And let’s be real, it’s so simple to make.

All you have to do is toss two ingredients in a bowl and you’re done! Whether it’s for a wedding, baby shower, tea party, or holiday gathering, this punch fits in at any event.

Ingredients For Lime Punch With Sherbet

Sprite: Adds the necessary fizz and citrusy sweetness. If Sprite isn’t available, any lemon-lime soda will work.
Lime sherbet: Provides a creamy texture and tangy-sweet flavor. If lime isn’t your thing, try raspberry or orange sherbet for a twist. Or, experiment with rainbow sherbert!

How To Make This Sherbet Punch Recipe

Step 1: Find The Right Bowl

First, find a suitable punch bowl that will comfortably accommodate your mixture. Most punch bowls on the market can fit at least a gallon of liquid, which equates to about 12 servings. Also, keep in mind that garnishes will take up space if you’re using them.

Step 2: Make The Punch

Begin by spooning scoops of lime sherbet into the selected punch bowl. Carefully pour the Sprite over the sherbet, ensuring it covers it evenly. Thoroughly stir to combine the two, but don’t be too aggressive to prevent the soda from turning flat.

Step 3: Chill The Punch

For optimal taste, place the punch bowl in your refrigerator for a brief cooling period. Once it’s adequately chilled, your sherbet punch recipe is ready for serving!

What To Serve With Sherbet Punch

Here are some delicious additions to make this sherbet punch recipe stand out for guests of all ages:

Fresh fruit: Sliced oranges, strawberries, or even pineapple can be added to the punch or served on the side.
Juice: To give your punch more complexity, try adding a splash of cranberry, orange, or pineapple juice. It can help balance the sweetness and impart a new flavor.
Alcohol: If your gathering includes adults, consider offering an option for a spirited punch by adding a splash of gin or vodka.
Garnishes: Mix fresh mint leaves, grated lime zest, or a cinnamon stick into the punch for a festive touch.
Accompanying snacks: Serve your punch with light, savory snacks like cheese, crackers, or pretzels. You can even make up a simple charcuterie board to really impress your guests.

Recipe Variations

Tropical: Replace Sprite with tropical soda, and use pineapple or mango sherbet.
Wintery: For holiday festivities, use cranberry juice with raspberry sherbet and sprinkle in some pomegranate seeds.
Mojito: Add fresh mint leaves and use lemon sherbet for a sherbet punch recipe with a hint of mojito flavors.
Tea infused: Replace half of the Sprite with brewed and cooled green or black tea for a subtle depth.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Stir gently: Avoid vigorous stirring as it can cause the soda to lose its fizz. Gentle folds will ensure this sherbet punch recipe remains bubbly.
Chill the ingredients: Make sure both your Sprite and sherbet are cold before preparing the punch, then chill it for an additional period after mixing.
Add ice sparingly: If you decide to add ice, use larger blocks or an ice ring. This prevents rapid melting and diluting of the punch.
Be mindful of portions: It’s easy to overdo portions when making a punch. Be sure to measure according to your guest count to avoid wasting anything.
Freshness first: Always aim to serve the punch as fresh as possible.

What To Do With Leftovers

Although lime punch with sherbet is a drink best consumed fresh, here are a few creative ways to repurpose and enjoy it if you end up with leftovers:

Popsicles: Pour the leftover punch into popsicle molds and freeze them.
Smoothie base: Use the punch as a base for morning smoothies. Add in some fresh fruits, yogurt, or berries for a nutritious kick.
Gelatin desserts: Combine the punch with unflavored gelatin to create a jiggly dessert.
Ice cubes: Freeze the punch in ice cube trays. These punch-infused ice cubes can be added to future drinks to give them a cool burst of flavor without watering them down.
Sorbet: If you have an ice cream maker, churn the punch to create a sorbet.
Cooking syrup: Reduce your sherbet punch over low heat until it thickens into a syrup. This can then be drizzled over desserts, pancakes, or waffles.
Re-fizz and serve: If you’re planning on drinking the punch within a day, try adding a splash of fresh soda before serving again to rejuvenate some of its fizz.

Additional Drink Recipes

If you enjoyed this sherbet punch recipe and are in the mood for more drinks, take a look at some festive options like these:

Mimosa Recipe

Southern Sherbet Punch

This sherbet punch recipe is an old-school Southern classic, perfect for the special occasions in your life. Filled with fizzy lemon-lime soda and creamy sherbet, it’s sweet, tangy, and creamy.

Course Drinks

Cuisine American, Southern

Keyword old fashioned recipe, punch, southern recipes, special occasion, vintage

Prep Time 5

Total Time 5

Servings people

Calories 2777kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Punch Bowl and Glasses

Ingredients

2 liters Sprite or other lemon-lime soda
48 ounces Lime sherbet about one container

Instructions

Spoon sherbet into punch bowl.
Pour sprite over sherbet. Stir.
Garnish and serve chilled.

Nutrition

The post Sherbet Punch Recipe appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Frozen Sweet Potato Fries

Anna Kate — Sun, 23 Jul 2023 10:00:00 +0000

Air fryer frozen sweet potato fries are a quick, simple, and versatile recipe that pairs well with mains like burgers, sandwiches, paninis, and more. In less than 15 minutes, you’ll be biting into golden, crispy, and perfectly-seasoned fries. Serve them as-is or dunked into your favorite sauce.

Why I Love This Recipe

Quick & easy: 15 minutes and one bag of frozen sweet potato fries are all you need for a crowd-pleasing snack or side dish.
Kid-approved: Both adults and kids love air fryer frozen sweet potato fries. This is the ideal finger food!
Healthier: Since there’s no deep-frying involved, this recipe is healthier than traditional deep-frying methods. The good news is that your fries will turn out just as crispy.
Versatile: Eat them as a snack, or add them to main dishes. You’ll even have your oven freed up for making dinner or dessert.

Air Fryer Sweet Potatoes

Compared to deep frying or baking in the oven, frozen sweet potato fries in the air fryer come out on top every time! There is much less oil required, but they turn out incredibly crispy and crunchy! And with how fast they cook, what’s not to love?

Just add them straight into the air fryer basket while frozen, then sprinkle them with your favorite seasonings. Serve your air fryer frozen sweet potato fries on their own or with dips like chipotle aioli, ketchup, or jalapeño ranch.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Frozen Sweet Potato Fries

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Sweet potato fries: To make life easier, I use frozen sweet potatoes. If you have whole sweet potatoes, make sure to cut them thinly and evenly for faster cooking time.
Salt: I like to use seasoning salt, but regular salt and pepper work as well! You can even make your own seasoning mix with herbs and spices like paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, cayenne, oregano, thyme, and rosemary.
Olive oil spray: I prefer olive oil spray since it has such a great flavor, but feel free to use any neutral vegetable oil with a high smoke point.

How To Air Fry Frozen Sweet Potato Fries

Step 1: Season The Sweet Potatoes

Place the frozen sweet potato fries in the basket of your air fryer. Season them with salt, and coat them lightly with olive oil spray.

Optionally, you can preheat your air fryer for a couple of minutes while you grab the ingredients.

Step 2: Air Fry The Sweet Potatoes

Set your air fryer to 400 degrees F, and cook the sweet potatoes for 10 minutes. Remove the basket and shake the fries, then cook them for an additional 5-10 minutes until crispy. If you prefer them to be extra crispy, leave them in for a few more minutes.

What To Serve With Sweet Potato Fries

Air fryer frozen sweet potato fries are absolutely delicious on their own, but serving them with dipping sauces takes the flavors to new heights. Try homemade Alabama white BBQ sauce, chipotle aioli, jalapeño ranch, or good old-fashioned ketchup!

Just like regular fries, they go well with burgers, chicken nuggets, ham and cheese sliders, pan-seared pork chops, and pretty much any other protein you can think of.

Recipe Variations

Fresh potatoes: If you don’t have access to frozen sweet potato fries, don’t worry! Just cut a peeled sweet potato into thin strips, toss them with oil and seasonings, then air fry them at 380 degrees F for 12-15 minutes.
Spicy: Turn the heat up on your sweet potato fries with spices like cayenne, red pepper flakes, Cajun seasoning, or Creole seasoning.
Garlic parmesan: Season your sweet potato fries with garlic powder and parmesan sprinkles for a mouthwatering combination.
Herbs: Once they are finished air frying, toss the fries with freshly minced parsley, thyme, or cilantro for a pop of color and herbaceous flavor.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Preheating helps: Although it’s not necessary, preheating really helps reduce cooking times and ensures your sweet potato fries turn out extra crispy.
Don’t overcrowd: It may be tempting to dump the whole bag of fries into the air fryer, but it’s best not to overcrowd them. Try to keep the fries in a single layer so the hot air has enough room to circulate around them.
Flip halfway: Don’t forget to flip them halfway in order to crisp up every side of the sweet potato fries.

What To Do With Leftovers

Sweet potato fries are just as good the next day, so don’t be afraid to make a double batch and follow these storage tips:

Fridge: Once cooled, transfer the fries to an airtight container and store them for up to 3-4 days in the fridge.
Freezer: You can refreeze sweet potato fries in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months, but it’s best to anticipate how much you’ll need so there’s no change in texture the next time you cook them.
Reheat: Reheat your sweet potato fries in the air fryer for 5-6 minutes at 375 degrees F, flipping halfway through. You can also heat them in the microwave in 30-second intervals, but they won’t be as crispy.

Additional Recipes

If you appreciated how easy this recipe for making frozen sweet potato fries in the air fryer was, check out some more of my easiest air fryer snacks:

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best oil for air fryer frozen sweet potato fries?

You can use any oil you prefer, but it’s best to choose one with a higher smoke point than you’re cooking temperature. I prefer the ease of cooking spray, but tossing them in oil works as well.

Does this recipe work with homemade sweet potato fries?

Yes, homemade sweet potato fries work in the air fryer. Cook them at 380 degrees F for about 12-15 minutes, flipping halfway.

How do I get my sweet potato fries to be extra crispy?

To make your sweet potato fries extra crispy, you can air fry them for longer. Additionally, make sure to serve them right away while they are still hot.

Crispy Air Fryer Frozen Sweet Potato Fries

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Side Dish

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, french fries, sweet potatoes

Cook Time 15

Total Time 15

Servings servings

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

16 ounces frozen sweet potato fries
salt I like to use seasoning salt
cooking spray

Instructions

Place the frozen fries in the basket of your air fryer. Sprinkle with salt and spray lightly with olive oil spray.
Cook at 400 °F degrees for 10 minutes. Shake the fries and cook for an additional 5-10 minutes until crispy.

The post Air Fryer Frozen Sweet Potato Fries appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Hot Pockets

Anna Kate — Sat, 22 Jul 2023 10:00:00 +0000

Air fryer Hot Pockets are going to be your new favorite recipe! In less than 10 minutes, you’ll be sitting down to golden brown, crispy, and melty pizza rolls. All you have to do is open the box and pop them in your air fryer, making them ideal for quick lunches, dinners, and snacks.

Why I Love This Recipe

Perfect texture: Compared to the oven or microwave, Hot Pockets in the air fryer turn out crispy, crunchy, and perfectly cooked. Preheating isn’t even a requirement!
Quick: All you need is 10 minutes and lunch or dinner will be on the table.
Reheating: If you don’t finish everything, leftovers can also be reheated in the air fryer.

I don’t know about y’all, but I’ve eaten a lot of Hot Pockets in my day. This tasty snack is an American classic, and it’s even better coming out of the air fryer! Plus, it takes less than half the time as an oven.

If there is one thing that could make Hot Pockets gourmet, it’s the cooking method. Seriously, the air fryer bakes up the crust just right and melts the cheese perfectly. Say goodbye to soggy, rubbery Hot Pockets from the microwave!

Ingredients For Air Fryer Hot Pockets

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Hot Pockets: I personally don’t think you can go wrong with the Hot Pocket classic four-cheese pizza flavor, but go for whichever flavor or variety you have on hand! There is pepperoni, buffalo, ham and cheddar, and even breakfast pockets. You’ll typically find them in the frozen section of any large grocery store.
Cooking spray: A neutral vegetable oil-based cooking spray works best. You can also brush the air fryer basket with vegetable oil if you don’t have an aerosol can.

How to Make Hot Pockets In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Preheat The Air Fryer

First, preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F. Preheating the air fryer isn’t technically necessary, but I prefer to do it for short recipes like this one.

Step 2: Add The Hot Pockets

Spray the bottom of the air fryer basket to prevent sticking, then place the frozen Hot Pockets at the bottom of the air fryer basket. Leave some space between the two Hot Pockets.

Step 3: Air Fry The Hot Pockets

Cook the Hot Pockets for 10 minutes, or until the outsides are golden brown and crispy. Serve them immediately whole hot as-is or with your favorite dipping sauce.

What To Serve With Air Fryer Hot Pockets

Hot Pockets are delicious on their own, but sometimes you just need some dip in your life! Try pairing them with sauces like Alabama white BBQ, ranch, honey mustard, marinara, or nacho cheese sauce.

Recipe Variations

Seasonings: Brush your air fryer Hot Pockets with melted butter followed by a sprinkle of parmesan cheese, fresh herbs like parsley and oregano, or crushed chili flakes.
Oven-baked: If you don’t have an air fryer, use an oven or toaster oven! Preheat it to 350 degrees F, then bake the Hot Pockets for 25-30 minutes, or until hot and crispy.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Single layer: Leave room between each Hot Pocket, and keep them in a single layer for optimal air circulation in the air fryer.
Cook from frozen: Don’t worry about thawing Hot Pockets before adding them to the air fryer. They will thaw as they cook!
Ditch the oil: You don’t need much oil (if any) for this recipe. The non-stick coating on the air fryer will do just fine.
Adjust the cooking time: If you haven’t cooked Hot Pockets in an air fryer before, you may need to adjust the cooking time based on your specific make and model.

What To Do With Leftovers

Fridge: Once the Hot Pockets are cooled, transfer them to a container and store them in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
Freezer: You technically can refreeze cooked Hot Pockets if the only other option is to throw them away. However, I find the texture isn’t quite the same once they thaw and cook again.
Reheat: Reheat cold Hot Pockets in the air fryer for 2-3 minutes at 350 degrees F, or until they are warmed all the way through.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoy air fryer Hot Pockets as much as I do, check these other simple recipes out:

Frequently Asked Questions

How long do you cook Hot Pockets in an air fryer?

Air fryer Hot Pockets take about 10 minutes at 375 degrees F if cooked from frozen. However, time and temperature may vary depending on the make and model of your air fryer. It’s best to switch up the settings until you find the perfect texture.

Do I have to put foil or parchment paper under the Hot Pockets?

No, you don’t have to put foil or parchment paper under the Hot Pockets. In fact, the foil or paper will likely inhibit air circulation, leading to prolonged or uneven cooking.

Do I have to preheat my air fryer to cook Hot Pockets?

You don’t have to preheat your air fryer, but I find it reduces the overall cooking time and helps achieve optimal crispiness.

10-Minute Air Fryer Hot Pockets

Course Appetizer, Snack

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, hot pocket

Cook Time 10

Total Time 10

Servings serving

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

2 frozen hot pockets
cooking spray

Instructions

Preheat the air fryer to 375℉.
Spray the bottom of the air fryer basket.
Place the frozen hot pockets at the bottom of the air fryer basket. Leave space between the two hot pockets.
Cook for 10 minutes or until the hot pocket is golden brown and crispy on the outside.
Serve immediately alone or with your favorite dipping sauce.

Nutrition

Serving: 1

The post Air Fryer Hot Pockets appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Frozen Potato Skins in the Air Fryer

Anna Kate — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 10:00:00 +0000

Try frozen potato skins in the air fryer for a quick, easy, and ultra-satisfying snack! If you have about 5 minutes to spare, you’ll have food on the table in less time than it takes to do the dishes. Serve your potato skins as an appetizer for guests, as part of a party tray, or on game days!

If you’ve ever found yourself frantically needing a last-minute snack or appetizer, let me introduce you to frozen potato skins in the air fryer! This kitchen appliance has made my life such a breeze, and I know it will do the same for you too.

Whenever I need a crowd-pleasing recipe that everyone will love, I make these air fryer potato skins. All you have to do is open the box, pop them into the air fryer, and wait for them to crisp up. I mean, how easy is that?!

Why I Love This Recipe

Crispy: Air fryer potato skins turn out extra crispy on the outside, but they remain tender and fluffy on the inside. It’s an irresistible combination of textures!
Healthy: Using an air fryer to make potato skins is healthier than other cooking methods. You don’t need as much oil, but they still deliver big on taste.
Convenient: This no-fuss recipe is ready to eat in little more than 5 minutes and requires minimal cleanup. Make it whenever you’re short on time!

What Are Potato Skins?

Potato skins are a popular snack or appetizer made from the skins of baked potatoes. Typically, the baked potatoes are cooked until tender, then the flesh is scooped out while leaving the skins behind.

Popular fillings include cheese, bacon, sour cream, and chives. They are then baked or broiled until the cheese melts and the skins turn extra crispy.

You can make your own potato skins at home, or use premade potato skins for a more convenient option. They are the perfect dish to serve at parties, game days, potlucks, and barbecues.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Potato Skins

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Potato skins: Use your favorite brand and flavor. You can use TGI Friday’s potato skins, Walmart potato skins, Trader Joe’s potato skins, or even homemade potato skins.

How to Make Frozen Potato Skins In The Air Fryer

Prepare The Skins

Remove the potato skins from the freezer. Decide how many you want to make and remove them from the package. It’s best to keep the potato skins frozen until you are ready to cook.

Air Fry The Potato Skins

Place the skins into the air fryer basket or air fryer tray. Air fry the potato skins at 370F for 5-6 minutes, or until they are crisped to your liking. Transfer them to a serving platter before adding garnishes.

How to Air Fry Homemade Potato Skins

If you’d prefer to make your own potato skins from scratch, first air fry raw potatoes at 400F for 45-60 minutes or bake the potatoes in the oven. You should be able to easily poke them with a fork or knife.

Let the potatoes cool until you can handle them. Cut them in half and scoop out the flesh with a spoon, leaving about ¼-inch of flesh behind. Save the rest of the flesh for another recipe.

Season the potato skins with salt, pepper, and any other spices you want. Add shredded cheese, bacon bits, or other fillings you enjoy.

Air fry homemade potato skins at 370F for 4-5 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and the skins are crisped to your liking.

Toppings For Potato Skins

One of my favorite parts about potato skins is the toppings! Make yours unique by adding shredded cheddar cheese, nacho cheese sauce, more bacon bits, sour cream, chives, green onions, cilantro, parsley, meat crumbles, beans, or corn. Just use your imagination!

What To Serve With Frozen Air Fryer Potato Skins

Air fryer frozen potato skins are the perfect finger food for holiday parties, get-togethers, and game nights. They also happen to make a delicious addition to any appetizer tray.

Try serving them alongside recipes like Bisquick sausage balls, air fryer pizza rolls, pigs in a blanket, and air fryer Buffalo wings for the ultimate spread!

Tips For The Best Recipe

Don’t thaw: Add the frozen potato skins to the air fryer without thawing them for the best results.
Preheat: For more accurate and consistent cooking times, preheat the air fryer for a couple of minutes before adding the potato skins in.
Don’t flip: Unlike most air fryer recipes that need to be flipped halfway through, potato skins do not need to be touched. You risk losing the fillings this way.
Watch closely: Since every air fryer is different and the thickness of potato skins vary, use my cooking times as a guideline only.

What To Do With Leftovers

Potato skins are best eaten straight out of the air fryer so they stay nice and crispy. But if you have leftovers, here’s what to do:

Fridge: You can store them in a sealed container in the fridge for 3-4 days. Just make sure they have fully cooled first.
Reheat: To reheat your potato skins, pop them back in the air fryer for 2-3 minutes. Alternatively, you can warm the potato skins up in the microwave in 15-20 second bursts until they reach your desired temperature.

Additional Recipes

If you love using the air fryer, here are some of my most popular air fryer recipes right now:

Frequently Asked Questions

How long do you cook frozen potato skins in the air fryer?

Cook your frozen potato skins in a preheated air fryer for 5-6 minutes at 370 degrees F. The cooking time may vary depending on the make and model of your particular air fryer.

Why aren’t my potato skins crispy?

If your potato skins aren’t crispy, just keep them in the air fryer for an additional 2-3 minutes. If they still won’t crisp up, turn the heat up by 20 degrees F.

Can I double or triple this recipe?

Yes, you can easily double or triple this recipe. However, you’ll likely have to do it in multiple batches. If the air fryer is crowded, the air won’t circulate well enough and you may not achieve crispy enough potato skins.

Easy Frozen Potato Skins in the Air Fryer

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Appetizer, Snack

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, appetizer, snacks

Cook Time 5

Total Time 5

Servings servings

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

1 package frozen potato skins

Instructions

Remove the potato skins from the freezer. Add desired number to the air fryer basket.
Place them into the air fryer basket air fry at 370F for 5-6 minutes.
Remove the skins from the air fryer, plate and enjoy.

The post Frozen Potato Skins in the Air Fryer appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Southern Pear Salad

Anna Kate — Tue, 18 Jul 2023 17:58:30 +0000

Try this Southern pear salad for a nostalgic delicacy, made with canned pears, mayonnaise, shredded cheese, and maraschino cherries. It might seem crazy, but the balance of sweet, tangy, and savory flavors work incredibly well together. Let’s take a trip down memory lane!

Growing up, pear salad was a staple in my Southern household, so it’s always held a special place in my heart. You might be thinking I’ve lost my marbles, but ask anyone from the South what a pear salad is, and they’ll pull up a picture of this recipe.

As with most salads in the South, like ambrosia, pear salad very loosely qualifies as an actual salad, but it’s definitely a Southern delicacy. Don’t worry, once you try your first bite, you’ll completely understand what I’m talking about!

Why I Love This Recipe

Simplicity: Just assemble the five layers on a plate. Does it get much easier?
Versatile: Pear salad makes a great side dish or even a light main course.
Unique: The unexpected combination of ingredients never fails to impress.
Nostalgic: Southern pear salad brings back so many fond childhood memories!

What Exactly Is A Southern Pear Salad?

Southern pear salad is an old-school classic that has graced many American dinner tables over the years. Its origin isn’t quite clear, but it’s rumored to have stemmed from an 1899 cookbook — The American Salad Cookbook.

It combines the sweet, juicy flavor of canned pear halves with the creamy tang of mayonnaise, both staples in the South. The sharp bite of cheddar cheese and a sweet pop of maraschino cherries add another element of color and flavor. And to make this an official “salad,” everything is served atop crispy pieces of lettuce.

This dish is typically served chilled, which enhances its refreshing qualities. Try making one for your next family gathering and your guests will love you! If not, at least it will get everyone talking, right?

Ingredients For Southern Pear Salad

Pear halves: This salad is traditionally made with canned pears for a sweet taste and soft texture, but fresh pears can also be used. I recommend peeling and roasting or poaching them.
Lettuce: Adds a refreshing crunch to contrast the soft pear halves. Any type of lettuce can be used, but iceberg, romaine, or butter lettuce work best.
Mayonnaise: The creamy tang of mayo complements the sweetness of the pear. If you prefer, you can substitute mayo with Greek yogurt for a healthier option.
Cheddar cheese: Provides a sharp savory note to the dish. If you don’t have cheddar, try other types of cheese like Jack, Gouda, or Swiss.
Maraschino cherries: Add a burst of sweetness and a pop of color. Fresh cherries can also be used, but maraschino cherries add that classic finishing touch.

How To Make A Southern Pear Salad

Step 1: Arrange Your Base

Start off by arranging the lettuce leaves on a serving platter or plate.

Step 2: Position The Pears

Place a pear half on each lettuce leaf, making sure there is just one half per piece.

Step 3: Add Mayo

Next, top each pear with a generous dollop of mayo. Trust me, this adds a creamy texture and tangy taste that complements the sweet pear perfectly.

Step 4: Sprinkle The Cheese

Now it’s time for cheese! Sprinkle shredded cheddar over the mayo to bring in the umami element.

Step 5: Cherry On Top

Finally, place a maraschino cherry on top of each pear. This adds a sweet finish and a pop of color. Then, chill and serve!

What To Serve With Southern Pear Salad

This salad works well as a side dish or appetizer, especially with mains pork tenderloin or dry ribs. You can also garnish it with a sprinkle of crushed nuts or a drizzle of honey for added texture and sweetness.

Recipe Variations

Cinnamon: Add a sprinkle of cinnamon for a touch of warmth.
Cream cheese: Use cream cheese in place of mayo for a sweeter flavor.
Nuts: Mix in a handful of toasted walnuts or pecans for crunch.
Fresh pairs: Replace canned pears with fresh pears, and add a drizzle of honey.
Bacon: Add crumbled bacon for a smoky twist.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Drain: Use well-drained pears to prevent the salad from turning soggy.
Shred at home: Shred the cheddar cheese yourself for the freshest flavor.
Use ripe pears: If you’re using fresh pears, choose ripe ones for the best texture.
Chill: Chill the salad before serving to allow the flavors to meld together.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have any leftover Southern pear salad, follow these quick and easy instructions:

Fridge: Keep any leftovers in the fridge for up to 2-3 days. Make sure you keep everything in airtight containers to keep it as fresh as possible.
Freezer: I don’t recommend freezing this pear salad recipe since the lettuce and mayo will turn soggy once thawed.
Prep ahead: You can portion the mayo into the pears and shred the cheese in advance. Assemble the pears on top of the lettuce and add the cherries just before serving.

Additional Salad Recipes

If you enjoyed this Southern pear salad, check out a few more of my favorite salad recipes like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use fresh pears instead of canned ones?

Of course! I recommend using in-season pears and making sure they’re ripe. For an even softer texture, poach them beforehand.

Can I replace the mayo with something else?

Absolutely! If you don’t like mayo or would prefer something different, you can use Greek yogurt, sour cream, or even mashed avocado.

What can I use instead of maraschino cherries?

If you don’t like maraschino cherries or don’t have access to them, you can use fresh cherries or pomegranate arils instead.

Why is it important to assemble just before serving?

Assembling the salad just before serving prevents the lettuce from becoming wilted and soggy. This ensures your recipe maintains its fresh, crisp texture.

Vintage Southern Pear Salad

Course Appetizer, Salad

Cuisine American, Southern

Keyword pear, southern, southern salad, vintage

Prep Time 10

Total Time 10

Servings

Calories 321kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

15 ounces pear halves drained
5 butter lettuce leaves
½ cup mayonnaise
½ cup cheddar cheese shredded
5 maraschino cherries

Instructions

Arrange the lettuce leaves on a large serving platter or plate. Top each leaf with a pear half. Add a heaping tablespoon of mayo on top of each pear. Sprinkle the shredded cheese over the mayo. Add a cherry to the top of each pear. Serve chilled.

Nutrition

The post Southern Pear Salad appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Boneless Skinless Chicken Thighs

Anna Kate — Tue, 18 Jul 2023 17:27:03 +0000

Air fryer boneless skinless chicken thighs make an incredibly healthy, delicious, and satisfying meal. The chicken is seasoned with a blend of spicy and savory seasonings, then cooked until crispy on the outside yet tender on the inside. The best part? Quick and easy clean up. It doesn’t get much better than that!

As someone who grew up in the South, I always enjoy fried chicken at family gatherings. Still, I remember how messy and time-consuming traditional deep-frying is!

This recipe for boneless skinless chicken thighs in the air fryer has all the same comforting flavors, but it’s made in a fraction of the time and with minimal effort. Although I always have a place in my heart for fried chicken, this is now a healthier and more convenient option I can’t get enough of!

Why I Love This Recipe

Healthy: Using an air fryer reduces the need for excessive oil and limits the overall calories of the dish.
Quick: Air frying ensures each chicken thigh cooks quickly, efficiently, and evenly.
Tender: These air fryer boneless skinless chicken thighs turn out crispy on the outside while retaining a juicy and moist interior.

The Best Air Fryer Chicken Thighs

Air fryer boneless skinless chicken thighs are a healthier take on classic fried chicken. While fried chicken is well-known worldwide, there is no doubt it’s a staple in Southern home cooking.

In this recipe, the chicken is generously coated with a blend of garlic, smoked paprika, oregano, salt, and pepper, filling each bite with smoky, savory, and spicy flavors.

The benefit of the air fryer is especially apparent with its ability to achieve a crispy exterior while keeping the inside juicy and moist. Serve this recipe as-is or alongside dishes like mac and cheese, coleslaw, potato salad, and cornbread.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Boneless Skinless Chicken Thighs

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Chicken thighs: I find boneless skinless chicken thighs work the best in the air fryer. For added flavor, you can use bone-in chicken thighs, but the cooking time will vary.
Garlic powder: Adds a savory flavor with slightly toasted undertones. Don’t have any garlic on hand? Substitute it with an equal amount of onion powder.
Smoked paprika: Imparts a mildly spicy, smoky, and sweet taste. You can substitute it with regular paprika for a milder flavor or sweet paprika.
Oregano: Adds an earthy, herbal, slightly bitter note. If you don’t have oregano, replace it with dried thyme, basil, or Italian seasoning.
Salt & pepper: Salt enhances the flavors of the other seasonings, while black pepper provides a mild kick. Adjust both to suit your taste.

How To Make Boneless Skinless Chicken Thighs In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Prepare The Chicken

Pat the chicken thighs dry with a paper towel, which not only helps the seasoning blend adhere but also results in crispier thighs. Once they are nice and dry, transfer them to a bowl.

Step 2: Season The Chicken

Combine all the seasonings in a bowl, then transfer them into the bowl with the chicken thighs. Using your hands, coat the chicken with the spices. Make sure to work the seasoning blend into the chicken so it infuses better.

Step 3: Air Fry The Chicken

While not completely necessary, I recommend preheating your air fryer to 380F. It should only take about 3-5 minutes, and you can do this while preparing the chicken.

Place the chicken smooth side down into the air fryer basket. Spray each chicken thigh with olive oil spray or cooking spray, then air fry them for 12 minutes.

Step 4: Flip And Finish Cooking

Once the air fryer beeps, use kitchen tongs to flip the chicken over, and cook for an additional 6-8 minutes on the second side, or until the chicken thighs are cooked through. Just note that every air fryer is different, so cooking times may vary slightly.

What To Serve With Chicken Thighs

Serve your chicken thighs by themselves or with a side of creamy coleslaw, a slice of skillet cornbread, or a Caprese salad. For a heartier, more filling meal, try adding a side of mashed potatoes, oven-baked sweet potatoes, or smashed red potatoes.

Recipe Variations

BBQ chicken: Brush the thighs with your favorite BBQ sauce during the last few minutes of cooking for a bold flavor.
Lemon herb: Add lemon zest along with dried rosemary, thyme, and basil to the blend for a zesty finish.
Spicy: Add cayenne pepper or hot sauce to the seasoning mix for a spicy kick.
Teriyaki: Marinate the chicken before frying it, then baste it towards the end of cooking.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Dry the chicken: Pat your chicken thighs until completely dry to ensure even cooking and crispiness. You can use a paper towel for easier cleanup.
Adjust the seasonings: Depending on your taste preferences, add more or fewer spices to suit your needs.
Use a thermometer: The best way to tell if your chicken is done is by using an instant-read thermometer. The chicken should reach an internal temperature of 165F.
Preheat: Preheat the air fryer for 3-5 minutes to ensure an even cooking of the chicken.
Increase the cooking time: If you’re using bone-in chicken thighs, you’ll need to increase the cooking time accordingly.
Don’t overcrowd: Overcrowding the air fryer basket leads to uneven cooking. Cook the chicken in batches if necessary.
Flip halfway: For the perfect brown and crisp, flip the chicken around the halfway point.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have leftover chicken thighs, follow these simple storage and reheating tips:

Fridge: Once fully cooled, transfer the leftover chicken to an airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.
Freezer: Wrap the chicken individually in aluminum foil, then keep it in a freezer-safe bag or container. It will stay fresh for up to 3 months if stored this way.
Reheating: Reheat leftovers in the air fryer at 350F for 4-5 minutes, or until they are warmed to your liking. Make sure to flip the thighs halfway for even heating.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed these air fryer boneless skinless chicken thighs, try a few more of my best protein-packed recipes like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use bone-in chicken thighs for this recipe?

Yes, you can use bone-in chicken thighs, but bone-in chicken thighs take longer to cook. Just remember to account for the increased time.

Do I need to use oil or nonstick spray?

Oil or nonstick spray helps prevent the thighs from sticking to the air fryer basket and promotes crispiness. I suggest using at least a little bit as it will make a difference in overall flavor.

Can I prepare this recipe in a conventional oven?

Yes, you can cook the chicken in a conventional oven at 400F for about 20-25 minutes, or until the chicken is cooked. Just note that the overall texture will be different compared to chicken cooked in the air fryer.

Air Fryer Boneless Skinless Chicken Thighs

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Main Course

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, Chicken, chicken thighs

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 20

Total Time 25

Servings

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

5-6 boneless skinless chicken thighs patted dry
1 teaspoon garlic powder
1 teaspoon smoked paprika
½ teaspoon oregano
½ teaspoon salt
¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

Pat chicken thighs dry with a paper towel, then transfer to a bowl.
Combine all the seasonings together in a bowl, then pour them into the bowl with the chicken and use your hands to coat the chicken with the spices.
Preheat your air fryer to 380° (mine took 3 minutes to preheat). Then, place chicken smooth side down into the air fryer, spray with nonstick spray/olive oil spray, and cook at 380° for 12 minutes. NOTE: every air fryer is different, so cook times may vary.
Once the air fryer beeps, use kitchen tongs to flip the chicken over, and cook for an additional 6-8 minutes on the second side, or until chicken is cooked through.

The post Air Fryer Boneless Skinless Chicken Thighs appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Frozen Waffles

Anna Kate — Tue, 18 Jul 2023 10:00:00 +0000

Don’t have time for homemade waffles? Air fryer frozen waffles are a quick, easy, and no-fuss breakfast that requires minimal effort and almost no cleanup. Enjoy them in the morning, as a snack on the go, or as part of a brunch spread.

Make busy mornings a breeze with this fuss-free, kid-approved breakfast. If you haven’t made air fryer waffles before, put that toaster oven down! You won’t be needing it again.

Just pull the waffles out of the freezer and pop them straight into the air fryer basket. It’s honestly that easy! Say goodbye to soft, soggy, and rubbery waffles.

This recipe results in crispy, golden-brown, and consistently-cooked waffles every time. It’s as though they’re freshly made! Enjoy them plain or with toppings like butter, syrup, and whipped cream.

Why I Love This Recipe

Quick: Breakfast is ready in less than 10 minutes from start to finish! No need to thaw.
Easy: Just pop frozen waffles in the air fryer and press start. It’s so easy, you can do it with your eyes closed!
Crispy: The air fryer makes everything taste better! Turn frozen waffles into a crispy masterpiece with the click of a button.
Customizable: Choose your favorite waffle flavor, add whipped cream, pair them with sliced fruit, or drizzle on chocolate sauce. There are so many ways to make air fryer frozen waffles your own!

Ingredients For Air Fryer Frozen Waffles

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Frozen waffles: My go-to brand is usually Eggo waffles, but there are so many options nowadays. Just choose your favorite variety! You can even use whole wheat waffles for a healthier option.

How To Make Frozen Waffles In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Add the waffles to the basket

Place the frozen waffles in the air fryer basket. Make sure they are in an even layer and aren’t touching. If they are overlapping, they will steam and turn out soggy.

Note: No cooking spray or oil is necessary for this recipe, but you’re welcome to use it if you prefer. In this case, opt for neutral vegetable oil.

Step 2: Cook the waffles

Air fry the waffles at 360°F/180°C for 4 minutes. Flip the waffles over and continue to cook them for another 1-3 minutes, or until they reach your preferred doneness. Serve them immediately while hot!

What To Serve With Air Fryer Waffles

You can never go wrong with classic waffle toppings like butter and syrup. If you want, try spicing up your air fryer frozen waffles with decadent garnishes like whipped cream, icing sugar, chocolate sauce, jam, nut butter, fresh fruit, or fruit compote.

For a full brunch spread, pair your waffles with crispy baked bacon, Ambrosia salad, cheesy hash browns, and baked apples.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Preheat the air fryer: While it’s technically not necessary to preheat an air fryer, it helps to more evenly cook food when recipes are shorter (like this one).
Don’t thaw the waffles: Don’t let your frozen waffles thaw, and avoid using fresh waffle batter. In both cases, the waffles will stick and make a mess in your air fryer basket.
Leave space: If you let the waffles overlap too much, they will steam rather than crisp up. Make sure to spread them out and cook them in batches if need be!
Watch them: Cooking times may vary depending on the brand of air fryer or the thickness of the waffle you’re using.

What To Do With Leftovers

Of course, my best suggestion is to just prepare frozen waffles fresh each day since they take so little time. But if you end up with leftover air fryer waffles, follow these simple storage tips:

Fridge: Transfer your waffles to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
Freezer: You can refreeze frozen waffles by wrapping them in aluminum foil, transferring them to a freezer-safe bag or container, and freezing them for up to 1 month. Just note, both the taste and texture may vary slightly once cooked again.
Reheating: Reheating your waffles is just as easy as making them the first time around. Add them to the air fryer and cook for 1-2 minutes per side, or until warmed through.

Additional Recipes

If you’re looking for more tasty breakfast ideas, look no further:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make homemade waffles in the air fryer?

While it’s not possible to make waffles from scratch directly in the air fryer, you can absolutely heat up any type of frozen waffle, including homemade ones. You will need to use a silicone mold to cook waffle batter in the air fryer.

Do I need to preheat my air fryer before making frozen waffles?

You don’t need to preheat the air fryer, but it’s best to preheat it for 3-5 minutes before adding the waffles for the most even cooking and consistent results.

Do I have to add oil or spray to my air fryer basket before cooking frozen waffles?

It’s not necessary to add oil to the air fryer basket before cooking frozen waffles. If you’re finding your waffles are sticking, you may want to try greasing the basket with cooking spray or oil beforehand.

How long do you cook frozen waffles in an air fryer?

To cook air fryer frozen waffles, you just have to take them out of the package and add them to an air fryer while still frozen. It should take about 5-7 minutes at 360 degrees F to fully cook frozen waffles. This may vary slightly depending on the make and model of your air fryer.

Easy Air Fryer Frozen Waffles

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Breakfast

Cuisine American

Keyword Breakfast, waffles

Cook Time 5

Total Time 5

Servings waffles

Calories 97kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

2 Frozen Waffles

Instructions

Place the frozen waffles in the air fryer basket in an even layer (make sure they aren’t overlapping).
Air Fry at 360°F for 4 minutes. Flip the waffles over and continue to Air Fry for another 1-3 minutes or until to your preferred doneness.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Frozen Waffles appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Pesto Without Pine Nuts

Anna Kate — Mon, 17 Jul 2023 16:25:46 +0000

Pesto without pine nuts is an easy, affordable, and delicious take on traditional versions! All you need is 6 simple ingredients and less than 10 minutes for this herbaceous and versatile sauce. Toss it with pasta, spread it on pizza, serve it with roasted vegetables, and more.

I’m such a sucker for simple and budget-friendly meals! Pesto is ridiculously good (no one can tell me otherwise), but it can be a bit pricey to make at home with how expensive pine nuts are.

This recipe ditches the nuts altogether, resulting in a version that contains fewer calories and is way more cost-effective. That means more pesto for everybody!

Why I Love This Recipe

Versatile: Use it as a dip or dressing, drizzle it on roasted vegetables, spread it on homemade pizza, or mix it with pasta. You can add this nut-free pesto to virtually anything and everything!
Allergy-friendly: Since it doesn’t contain any nuts, it’s safe to send to work or school. Plus, it can be enjoyed by people who follow almost any diet.
Few ingredients: Seriously, it is possible to make a delicious pesto recipe with just 6 easy-to-find ingredients.

Easy Pesto Without Pine Nuts

Traditionally, pesto is made from fresh basil, garlic, pine nuts, Parmesan cheese, and olive oil. While the classic version is perfect as-is, the pine nuts really do drive up the price tag!

I’m here to tell you that you can make just as flavorful of a recipe while still taking it easy on the wallet. In fact, many people prefer the flavor of pesto without pine nuts, don’t have access to them, or may even be allergic.

This simple recipe requires just 6 ingredients (including salt and pepper) and can be added to all your favorite dishes. From pasta to pizza, it adds herbaceous, zesty, and garlicky flavors. Try it out for yourself and thank me later!

Ingredients For Pesto Without Pine Nuts

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves provide bold, zesty, and savory notes. Try not to use garlic powder for this recipe if possible.
Basil leaves: You will ideally want Genovese, Italian Large Leaf, or sweet basil for a bright and vibrant pesto flavor.
Olive oil: Make sure to use high-quality extra-virgin olive oil as it really makes a difference! Avocado oil works as well, but it isn’t quite the same.
Parmesan: Adds a salty, cheesy, and umami-rich flavor. Use freshly grated Parmesan for the best taste. If you don’t have Parmesan, swap in Pecorino Romano cheese.
Salt & pepper: Since Parmesan is already quite salty, taste the pesto before adding too much salt. Cracked black pepper adds a slight kick!

How To Make Pesto Without Nuts

Step 1: Pulse the garlic & basil

Place the garlic and basil in a food processor or blender and pulse until everything is roughly chopped. Be careful not to over-pulse as it will overheat the basil, changing the flavor and color.

Step 2: Add the oil

Once the basil and garlic are pulsed, add the oil and pepper and process the mixture. Make sure to scrape down the sides throughout processing until everything is well blended. If it is still very thick and hard to blend, add more olive oil a little bit at a time.

Step 3: Mix in the cheese

Add the Parmesan and pulse the pesto until the cheese is incorporated. Taste it and add salt to your liking. Start with a small amount since you shouldn’t need too much!

What To Serve With Pesto

Serve pesto without pine nuts just like you would traditional pesto! Here are some of my favorite ideas:

Pizza: Replace tomato sauce with pesto for homemade pizza.
Pasta: Toss pesto without nuts with your favorite pasta like linguine, penne, angel hair, or even gnocchi.
Sandwiches & paninis: Spread it on chicken paninis, sandwiches, or wraps.
Dips: Mix some pesto into a vinaigrette, hummus, or mayonnaise for a herbaceous and vibrant dip.
Roasted vegetables: Drizzle some over roasted vegetables for a summery side dish.

What To Do With Leftovers

Leftovers are always welcome when it comes to pesto without pine nuts. Follow these simple tips to keep your batch fresh:

Fridge: Transfer pesto to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for 6-7 days.
Freezer: You can also freeze pesto for longer storage periods. Spoon it evenly into an ice cube tray and place it in the freezer until hardened. Once frozen, you can transfer the cubes to a freezer-safe bag or container. If kept this way, the pesto will last at least 5 months.

Note: You may notice a little browning as the pesto sits in the fridge. You can prevent this by layering plastic wrap directly over the surface of the pesto.

Recipe Variations

Greens: Not enough basil? Replace some or all of it with greens like arugula, cilantro, mint, kale, spinach, or parsley.
Nuts: For a more traditional version, add pine nuts. Alternatively, try blanched almonds, raw cashews, walnuts, or sunflower seeds.
Add-ins: Make a unique flavor twist by adding ingredients like sun-dried tomatoes, lemon juice, or roasted red peppers.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Fresh basil: Using fresh basil makes all the difference in the world. Don’t even think about using dried basil because it doesn’t release the natural oils. Fresh basil is what makes pesto such a beloved condiment!
Don’t blend too long: Blending basil too long causes oxidation, resulting in brown basil. Make sure to only pulse the pesto until just combined for a vibrant green color.
Store correctly: In addition to following the storage instructions outlined, you can add a layer of oil on top of this pesto without nuts to reduce the chances of browning.
Salt: Salt helps break the basil down, so don’t skip adding it (but, don’t go overboard)!

Additional Recipes

If you’re a fan of pesto without pine nuts, here are some more of my favorite sauces for you to test out:

Frequently Asked Questions

Is pesto vegan?

Pesto is not typically vegan-friendly because of the Parmesan cheese. However, you can easily skip the Parmesan or use a dairy-free variety.

What can I use instead of pine nuts in pesto?

There are so many ways to make pesto without pine nuts. You don’t need to use nuts at all, but you can also add options like almonds, cashews, hazelnuts, or walnuts if you prefer more texture and flavor.

How important are pine nuts in pesto?

Although pine nuts are traditionally found in pesto, they are not 100% necessary to create a flavorful condiment. You can add other nuts or leave them out completely. Without pine nuts, pesto is much cheaper and less calorie-dense.

Easy Pesto without Pine Nuts

Pesto without pine nuts is an easy, affordable, and delicious take on traditional versions! All you need is 6 simple ingredients and less than 10 minutes for this herbaceous and versatile sauce. Toss it with pasta, spread it on pizza, serve it with roasted vegetables, and more.

Course Condiments, sauces

Cuisine American

Keyword cheap dinner, pasta, pasta sauce, pesto, sauces

Prep Time 10

Total Time 10

Servings

Calories 88kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

1 clove garlic roughly chopped
1 cup basil
⅓ cup olive oil plus more as needed
3 tablespoons Parmesan Cheese finely grated
kosher salt to taste
black pepper to taste

Instructions

Add the garlic and basil to a food processor or blender and pulse until everything is roughly chopped.
Add the oil and a pinch of black pepper and process until well blended.
Add the cheese and pulse until blended in. Taste and add salt as desired.
If the sauce is too thick, continue adding olive oil and blending until you reach the desired consistency.

Nutrition

The post Pesto Without Pine Nuts appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Cinnamon Roll Bites

Anna Kate — Fri, 23 Jun 2023 04:00:00 +0000

Sweet and tender air fryer cinnamon roll bites are ready to eat in just 6 minutes! Made from canned cinnamon rolls, this recipe is simple to make and will quickly become a family favorite for weekend brunches. Just don’t forget the cream cheese frosting for dipping them in!

Whether you prefer cinnamon rolls for breakfast, brunch, or dessert, there’s no denying that making them in the air fryer is by far the quickest and easiest method. Don’t get me wrong, making cinnamon rolls from scratch is something all of us want to do, but sometimes we just don’t have the extra time!

Do yourself a favor and make life easier with this air fryer cinnamon roll bites recipe! You’ll be everyone’s favorite person in the morning when your family wakes up to the sweet, warming smells of cinnamon rolls.

Why I Love This Recipe

Simple: There’s nothing easier than opening a can, cutting the dough, and popping them in the air fryer.
Quick: You’ll have breakfast on the table in less than 15 minutes from start to finish. Use this recipe during busy mornings, or make weekend breakfasts extra special by including these bites in a full spread.
Few ingredients: One can of cinnamon rolls and a 4-ingredient cream cheese frosting is all you need. For how delicious the final result is, there aren’t a lot of moving parts!

Which Cinnamon Rolls Are Best?

The cinnamon roll brand you go for depends entirely on your preferences, budget, and availability. I’ve listed a few brands to help you decide, but any brand should do the trick.

Pillsbury: For a nostalgic feel and flavor, Pillsbury takes the cake (or should I say the cinnamon roll)! They are not too cinnamon-forward, light in texture, and have the best icing in my opinion. Plus, they are the most widely available brand on the market.
Immaculate: A great option if you are trying to be more health-conscious. These rolls are made with whole wheat flour and organic ingredients, so you can feel better about indulging in extra air fryer cinnamon roll bites!
Great Value: If you are on a budget, you can’t go wrong with Great Value! They don’t have quite the same taste as the other options, but the price point is hard to beat.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Cinnamon Roll Bites

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Cinnamon rolls: For this recipe, I used Pillsbury Cinnamon Rolls with Original Icing, which comes with 8 rolls per can. Although, you can use whichever brand you prefer or is available near you.
Granulated sugar: Regular granulated sugar is best, but cane sugar will also work!
Cinnamon: The best flavor comes from Ceylon (true) cinnamon, providing a quintessential cinnamon roll flavor. But, cassia cinnamon can be substituted in a pinch.
Cream cheese: To make the base of the dipping icing. Make sure it is softened before starting to beat the cream cheese and butter together.
Butter: Adds a rich flavor and texture to the dip. Regular or unsalted both work. Again, make sure it is softened!
Powdered sugar: For sweetness and a melt-in-your-mouth icing dip consistency. If you don’t have powdered sugar on hand, blend some granulated sugar and a little cornstarch into a fine powder.
Milk: You just need a couple of tablespoons to thin the icing. Use regular 2%, whole milk, or non-dairy milk of your choice.

How to Make Air Fryer Cinnamon Roll Bites

Step 1: Prepare The Air Fryer

Cut an 8-inch round of cooking parchment paper, then place it in the bottom of your air fryer basket. This will prevent the rolls from sticking and make cleanup a breeze!

Step 2: Divide the Cinnamon Rolls

Separate the cinnamon roll dough into 8 equal pieces. Cut each roll into 4 equal quarters, then place 16 pieces in the bottom of the air fryer basket. Set the icing that comes in the can aside for now.

Step 3: Air Fry The Cinnamon Roll Bites

Set the air fryer to 325 degrees F, and cook the cinnamon roll bites for 3 minutes. Using tongs, turn the bites over, then cook them for another 2 to 3 minutes.

When they appear golden brown, remove the cinnamon roll bites from the air fryer, and repeat the same process with the remaining 16 pieces.

Step 4: Make The Dip

In the meantime, add the cinnamon and granulated sugar to a large resealable food-storage plastic bag. Close the bag and shake the mixture until it is well combined.

In a small bowl, beat the cream cheese and softened butter with an electric mixer on medium speed. When the mixture is smooth, beat in the powdered sugar, reserved icing, and enough milk to make a dip consistency.

Step 5: Assemble

Add the warm bites to the bag of cinnamon sugar, then shake to coat the pieces evenly. Serve your cinnamon roll bites warm with a side of dipping icing.

What To Serve With Cinnamon Roll Bites

For a full breakfast or brunch spread, serve your air fryer cinnamon roll bites with recipes like a breakfast casserole, baked apples, sheet pan pancakes, a hashbrown casserole, or crispy baked bacon.

While I highly recommend the cream cheese dipping icing, you can pair your bites with chocolate syrup, caramel sauce, buttercream, or regular icing.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Cut into even sizes: For consistent results, make sure to cut each cinnamon roll bite into equivalent portions.
Shake halfway: Don’t forget to shake or flip the bites halfway so they cook evenly on all sides.
Don’t forget the dip: The dip is arguably the best part. Don’t skip making it!

What To Do With Leftovers

Fridge: Once cooled, transfer the cinnamon roll bites to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. The cream cheese frosting will last for up to a week as long as it’s stored in a clean container.
Freezer: You can prepare air fryer cinnamon roll bites ahead of time or freeze leftovers. Just make sure they’re cooled, then store them for 1-2 months in a freezer-safe bag or container.
Reheating: If frozen, thaw the cinnamon rolls in the fridge overnight. Heat them in the air fryer for 1-2 minutes at 325 degrees F, or until warmed all the way through.

Additional Recipes

For more sweet treats, take a look at some of my most popular recipes right now:

Frequently Asked Questions

Are air fryer cinnamon roll bites gluten-free?

No, air fryer cinnamon roll bites are not gluten-free. Since this recipe is made with Pillsbury Cinnamon Rolls, it contains wheat. However, you can use your favorite brand of premade gluten-free cinnamon roll dough.

Best Air Fryer Cinnamon Roll Bites

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Breakfast

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, cinnamon roll, sweets

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 6

Total Time 11

Servings people

Calories 122kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

1 Air Fryer

Ingredients

8 count Pillsbury Cinnamon Rolls with Original Icing 8 Count
⅓ cup granulated sugar
½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Dipping Icing Ingredients

4 ounces cream cheese softened
1 tablespoon butter softened
1 cup powdered sugar
2-3 teaspoons milk

Instructions

Air Fry the Cinnamon Rolls

Cut an 8-inch round piece of cooking parchment paper. Place in bottom of air fryer basket.
Separate each cinnamon roll (8 rolls). Then, cut each roll into 4 equal pieces. Place all 16 pieces in the bottom of the air fryer basket. Set icing aside.
Preheat the air fryer to 325°F. Cook for 3 minutes, turn each piece over, then cook for another 2-3 minutes until golden brown. Remove from the air fryer. Repeat in batches as needed.

Make the Cinnamon Sugar

Meanwhile, in a large resealable food-storage plastic bag, mix cinnamon and granulated sugar. Set aside.

Make the Cream Cheese Dipping Icing

In a small bowl, beat cream cheese and softened butter with an electric mixer on medium speed until smooth. Next, beat in powdered sugar, reserved icing, and enough milk for desired dipping consistency.
Shake warm cinnamon roll pieces in the cinnamon-sugar mixture. Serve these warm with dipping icing.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Cinnamon Roll Bites appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Frozen Meatballs

Anna Kate — Thu, 22 Jun 2023 18:15:53 +0000

Air fryer frozen meatballs make for a quick appetizer or an easy addition to weeknight meals like spaghetti with tomato sauce. Just open the package, pop them in the air fryer, and you’ll have food on the table in 12 minutes or less!

If you haven’t already noticed, I’m on a little bit of an air fryer kick lately. I mean, what’s not to love about quick recipes, fast cleanup, and healthy food? It’s the perfect combination!

See all of my air fryer recipes here!

Plus, if you have picky eaters at home, you can bet they’re going to love dunking meatballs in classic dips like barbecue, ketchup, honey mustard, and more. There are countless ways to serve these super easy meatballs!

Why This Recipe Works

Easy: Open a bag of frozen meatballs and pop them straight into your air fryer. Take a load off on busy weeks by making use of this handy kitchen appliance!
Quick: From start to finish, cooking frozen meatballs in the air fryer takes all of 12 minutes. There is no need to fuss over preheating the oven or stovetop, or defrosting the meatballs!
Versatile: Use meatballs as a snack or appetizer with your favorite sauces, or add them to mains for a well-balanced meal.
Healthy: High in protein and other nutrients, meatballs make the perfect addition to a healthy diet.
Kid-friendly: Meatballs are not just enjoyed by adults, they are also 100% kid-approved! They make a great option for after-school snacks, movie nights, or lunches.

Easy Air Fryer Meatballs

Made with just 2 simple ingredients, air fryer frozen meatballs are one of my favorite recipes to make when I’m short on time. I can add them to spaghetti and tomato sauce, or serve them with roasted vegetables and mashed potatoes for a quick, easy, and incredibly flavorful meal.

That’s not all! Try adding them to meatball subs, rice pilaf, or fried cabbage and egg noodles. Unlike the oven, the air fryer results in meatballs that are soft on the inside yet perfectly crispy on the outside. My family always goes a little crazy when they smell me cooking them!

In case you’re wondering, I use a Ninja Foodi Air Fryer for all of my air fryer needs. It’s served me well, from pizza rolls and French fries to “grilled” chicken breast and chicken nuggets. I can always trust my air fryer to keep me sane during busy weeks!

Ingredients For Air Fryer Frozen Meatballs

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Frozen Meatballs: Use your favorite brand and variety of frozen meatballs in the air fryer. You can opt for any flavor you like!
Olive oil: Use olive oil cooking spray to evenly coat the meatballs and the air fryer basket. Alternatively, you can use canola oil or another neutral cooking spray.
Sauce: To toss or dip the meatballs in once they are done cooking. My go-to options are barbecue or tomato sauce, but you can use whichever sauce you prefer.

How to Make Air Fryer Frozen Meatballs

Step 1: Prepare The Meatballs

Place the frozen meatballs in the basket insert of your air fryer, spreading them out into a single even layer. You can cook the meatballs in batches if need be. Coat the meatballs evenly with cooking spray.

Step 2: Air Fry The Meatballs

Air fry the meatballs at 380°F for 8-12 minutes, or until heated all the way through. The cooking time will vary slightly depending on the size of your meatballs.

Remember to gently shake and turn them at the halfway point. This will also give you a good idea of how fast they are cooking.

Step 3: Toss Them In Sauce

If desired, heat your favorite sauce and toss it with the meatballs before serving.

Alternatively, serve your meatballs with a side of bbq sauce or marinara sauce, on top of spaghetti, as Swedish meatballs, or in any recipe that calls for meatballs!

What To Serve With Meatballs

Air fryer meatballs make a quick and easy addition to recipes like spaghetti and meatballs, meatball subs, pizza, meatball wraps, and French onion soup meatballs.

You can serve air fryer meatballs for a snack or appetizer with horseradish sauce, garlic butter, or Alabama white BBQ sauce. Alternatively, toss the meatballs in sweet and sour sauce, honey garlic sauce, or teriyaki sauce.

Recipe Variations

Flavored: There are many options when it comes to frozen meatball flavors. Try Italian, Asian, Indian, etc. Use the flavor that will complement your meal the best.
Different protein: If beef isn’t your thing, try chicken, turkey, or even vegan meatballs.
Sauce: Experiment with different sauces! Try classics like BBQ and ketchup, or branch out with sweet chili, teriyaki, buffalo, or Sriracha hot sauce.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Don’t overcrowd the basket: Overcrowding the basket can cause air to get trapped and not circulate properly. Make sure the meatballs are in a single layer and not stacked on one another. If you need, make them in batches to avoid a soggy texture.
Shake halfway: Around the 4-6 minute mark, give the air fryer basket a gentle shake to evenly cook the meatballs on all sides.
Use spray oil: Adding a little bit of cooking spray will help prevent the meatballs from sticking to the air fryer, resulting in an even crispier texture.
Avoid overcooking: No one likes dry meatballs, so watch for the outside to be lightly browned. If you want to be exact, use an instant-read thermometer and make sure the internal temperature reads 160 degrees F.

What To Do With Leftovers

The great thing about air fryer frozen meatballs is that they store extremely well. Here’s what to do so they stay fresh for longer:

Fridge: Keep the meatballs in an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 4-5 days.
Freezer: Once the meatballs are fully cooled, you can freeze them again. Transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container, and they’ll last for up to 1 month.
Reheat: To reheat your meatballs in the air fryer, set it to 325 degrees F and cook them for 3-4 minutes, or until warmed all the way through.

Additional Recipes

If you love easy-to-make dishes as much as I do, try some more of my most popular air fryer recipes like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Do I thaw frozen meatballs before air frying?

You do not have to thaw meatballs before air frying them. It’s actually not recommended as cooking them from frozen will yield the crispiest meatballs.

How long does it take to cook frozen meatballs in the air fryer?

To cook frozen meatballs in the air fryer, add them to the basket in a single layer and cook them at 380 degrees F for 8-12 minutes, flipping halfway. The cooking time may vary depending on the size of your specific meatballs.

Crispy Air Fryer Frozen Meatballs

Calories 1193kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

1 pound Meatballs frozen
cooking spray
Sauce for dipping (optional)

Instructions

Place the frozen meatballs in the air fryer basket and spread out into a single even layer (cook in batches if needed). Coat the meatballs evenly with oil spray.
Air Fry at 380°F for 8-12 minutes (depending on size) or until heated all the way through, gently shaking and turning the meatballs halfway through cooking.
If desired, heat your favorite sauce & toss with the meatballs before serving.
Alternatively, serve with bbq sauce, marinara sauce, on top of spaghetti, or in any recipe that requires meatballs.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Frozen Meatballs appeared first on Southern Cravings.

How to Cook Turkey Bacon

Anna Kate — Thu, 22 Jun 2023 17:49:25 +0000

Learning how to cook turkey bacon couldn’t be easier! This simple guide will show you how to create a perfectly crispy texture every time. Whether you’re looking to use the air fryer or the oven, this post is for you!

We’re all told there are health benefits of switching from pork bacon to turkey bacon, but turkey bacon always seems to turn out bland and floppy. Well, that problem ends today!

I’ll show you how to achieve crispy and flavorful bacon in no time using the oven or air fryer. Spoiler alert — it’s much easier than you think!

Why I Love This Recipe

Consistent: Once you try this recipe, you’ll know how to cook turkey bacon with your eyes closed! Find the optimal crisp for you, then put things on repeat!
Easy: You don’t have to sit beside a hot pan and watch your bacon like a hawk. Using the oven or the air fryer means a set-it-and-forget-it approach.
Less mess: No more bacon grease splatters on you or your kitchen! Both of these methods require very little effort in the cleanup department.

What Is Turkey Bacon?

Unlike pork bacon, which comes from the belly of a pig, turkey bacon is made from a mixture of dark and light turkey meat. It is seasoned to taste like bacon, then pressed into strips.

Since it’s a leaner cut of meat than pork bacon, the cooking technique is important in yielding a flavorful and crispy texture that will make you think twice before reaching for pork again. Don’t worry though, I’ve got you covered!

Is Turkey Bacon Healthier Than Pork Bacon?

Turkey bacon and pork bacon can both be part of a healthy and well-balanced diet. But, if you’re a die-hard bacon lover, switching a few mornings to turkey bacon may have some positive impacts on your waistline!

Turkey bacon contains fewer calories, fewer “bad” fats, and less cholesterol, making it a slightly better option for anyone with an increased risk of heart disease or diabetes. Regardless of whether it’s pork or turkey, it’s best to consume bacon in moderation!

What You’ll Need To Cook Turkey Bacon

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Turkey bacon: If you are trying to be more mindful of your cholesterol intake, turkey bacon is the ideal choice! I usually opt for nitrate-free, uncured turkey bacon since I like that it contains natural ingredients as opposed to chemical preservatives. Go for brands like Trader Joe’s, Applegate Naturals, and Wellshire for the best options.
Air fryer or oven: I’ve laid out options for how to cook turkey bacon in both an air fryer and an oven. I personally love how crispy my air fryer gets the slices, but you can also achieve similar results in the oven.

How to Cook Turkey Bacon In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Prep The Bacon

First, you will need to add the turkey bacon slices to your air fryer basket in a single layer. Make sure the strips are not overlapping for optimal crispiness! If they are too long, cut the pieces in half.

Step 2: Air Fry The Bacon

Air fry the turkey bacon at 390 degrees F for 5 minutes. Flip the slices over, then cook them for another 3-5 minutes, depending on how crispy you prefer your bacon.

Step 3: Finish Cooking

Remove the turkey bacon from the air fryer, and serve it while hot and crispy! If you have more turkey bacon, continue cooking it the same way until all the remaining slices are gone.

How to Cook Turkey Bacon In The Oven

Step 1: Preheat The Oven

Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F, and place a wire rack on top of the baking sheet. Optionally, you can line the baking sheet with parchment paper for easier cleanup.

Step 2: Bake The Bacon

Place the strips of turkey bacon on the wire rack, being careful not to overlap them. Bake the turkey bacon for 10 minutes, then flip the strips and bake for an additional 10 minutes, or until crispy.

Note: The exact amount of time will vary based on the thickness of your bacon, your oven, and how crispy you prefer your bacon. I recommend starting to check on them after the 13 to 14-minute mark.

Step 3: Drain The Bacon

Remove the turkey bacon from the oven, and place them on paper towels to drain any excess grease. Serve the strips while warm!

What To Serve With Turkey Bacon

For a full breakfast spread, serve your turkey bacon with recipes like breakfast casserole with sausage, sheet pan pancakes, hashbrown casserole, or pressure cooker hard-boiled eggs.

Alternatively, use it as a garnish for soups and salads, or as an addition to sandwiches like BLTs. The options are virtually endless!

Recipe Variations

Use a toaster oven: If space is an issue in your kitchen (or you don’t own an oven), use a toaster oven! Follow the same principles and guidelines for using a regular oven.
Add seasonings: For an extra kick, add a crack of black pepper before baking or air-frying your turkey bacon!

Tips For The Best Recipe

Pat it dry: If your turkey bacon appears a little wet when you remove it from the package, make sure to thoroughly pat it dry for optimal crisp-ability.
Use a wire rack: Bake the turkey bacon on a wire rack for the best airflow all around the strips, which helps them crisp up beautifully. For easier cleanup, place a sheet of parchment paper or foil underneath the wire rack!
Flip the bacon: Don’t forget to flip the bacon at the halfway point, which will ensure an even crisp on both sides.
Keep a close eye: All oven temperatures vary slightly. Once you flip your turkey bacon, keep a closer eye on how quickly it’s browning to prevent it from burning.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you end up with leftover turkey bacon, store the strips in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4-5 days.

The easiest way to reheat the slices is in the air fryer. Set it to 300 degrees F, and cook the bacon in a single layer for 3-4 minutes, or until hot again. You can also heat the strips up in a microwave in 30-second bursts, or you can use a toaster oven set to 350 degrees F for 5-7 minutes.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed learning how to cook turkey bacon, be sure to check out a few more of my best how-to recipes:

Frequently Asked Questions

How long should I cook turkey bacon?

Depending on the method of cooking, cooking turkey bacon takes anywhere from 10-20 minutes.

What is the fastest way to cook turkey bacon?

The fastest way to cook turkey bacon is by using an air fryer. It will take about 8-10 minutes to fully cook, depending on the thickness and how crispy you want it.

Can you overcook turkey bacon?

Yes, one of the most important tips is to not overcook turkey bacon. If it’s overcooked, it will turn out dry and leathery.

How to Cook Turkey Bacon

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Breakfast

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer recipe, Bacon, easy recipes

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 10

Total Time 15

Calories 1513kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

1 Air Fryer
1 Baking Sheet with rack

Ingredients

1 package turkey bacon

Instructions

Air Fryer Method

Add turkey bacon slices to air fryer basket in a single layer. If they are too long, cut the pieces in half.
Cook at 390 °F degrees for 5 minutes. Flip the slices over. Cook for another 3-5 minutes depending on how crisp you prefer your bacon.
Remove turkey bacon from air fryer and serve warm.
Cook remaining bacon slices.

Oven Method

Preheat oven to 400 °F and place baking rack on top of baking sheet.
Place strips of bacon on baking rack, careful not to overlap. Bake 10 minutes, then flip bacon strips and bake another 10 minutes.
Remove from oven and place on paper towels to drain any remaining grease.

Nutrition

The post How to Cook Turkey Bacon appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Zesty Italian Pasta Salad

Anna Kate — Wed, 26 Apr 2023 21:07:49 +0000

Make this zesty Italian pasta salad for the perfect side dish to bring to potlucks, barbecues, and cookouts! Made in under 30 minutes, it’s full of fresh vegetables, tangy Italian dressing, and feta cheese. Plus, it couldn’t be easier to customize!

This zesty Italian pasta salad comes in handy for those last-minute pool day invites, cookouts, and tailgating parties. With a few simple ingredients, like pasta and dressing, you can toss in whatever you have on hand!

I love pairing pasta salad with a pulled pork sandwich, roasted chicken, or oven-roasted ribs. Since it keeps well, it’s also great for meal prep!

Why I Love This Recipe

Easy: No matter what your cooking level is, you can make this delicious pasta salad! It’s ready in minutes and requires little effort in the kitchen.
Healthy: This recipe is packed with nutritious vegetables, and it’s tossed in a light vinaigrette. It’s both satisfying and health-conscious!
Customizable: Swap out or add extra vegetables, use gluten-free pasta, or experiment with different cheese varieties. There are so many ways to make this classic pasta salad your own!

Easy Zesty Italian Pasta Salad

This zesty Italian pasta salad is a staple in my house because it’s incredibly simple to make, uses affordable ingredients, and is on the table in 30 minutes or less! This recipe is always a crowd-pleaser with its combination of textures and flavors.

Tri-color rotini provides the perfect canvas for zesty dressing, tangy feta, and a medley of fresh veggies. Its vibrant color and taste will leave your friends and family asking for seconds after their first bite! Serve it as a side dish at your next barbecue, or add protein to it and enjoy it as a standalone meal.

Best Noodles For Pasta Salad

I have always used the multi-colored rotini (spiral-shaped noodles) in my pasta salad, but any hearty pasta will do. Avoid spaghetti or long/large noodles as they will be more difficult to serve and eat.

The best noodles for making pasta salad include these types:

Multi-colored rotini (spiral shape)
Farfalle (bowtie shape)
Penne
Fusilli
Tortellini (for a fun flavor addition)

Ingredients For Zesty Italian Pasta Salad

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Rotini: The spiral shape of the rotini perfectly catches all of the dressing! You can also experiment with other short pasta that I’ve listed above.
Olives: My favorite varieties for pasta salad are Kalamata and black olives, but feel free to use green olives or your favorite type of olives.
Italian dressing: Store-bought or homemade both work here. For a simple Italian dressing, combine olive oil, white wine vinegar, lemon, honey, and Italian herbs.
Cherry tomatoes: Impart juicy, zesty, and vibrant flavors to the salad. Grape tomatoes, diced Roma tomatoes, or even sun-dried tomatoes will work as well.
Banana peppers: Add just a touch of heat and a tangy element. For extra spice, use pickled jalapeños. If you’re sensitive to spice, omit the peppers altogether.
Green onions: Provide a pop of color and a subtly savory flavor. Feel free to substitute green onions with red onions or shallots if you’d prefer!
Feta cheese: Crumbled feta adds salty, umami-rich flavors and creamy, crumbly textures in each bite. If you don’t have feta available, try goat cheese or cotija cheese.
Seasonings: I like to use a simple combination of oregano, salt, and pepper. Other options include basil, thyme, or an Italian mix.

How to Make A Classic Pasta Salad

Step 1: Cook The Pasta

Cook pasta until al dente. You don’t want it to be too mushy for pasta salad. I recommend checking on it about 2-3 minutes before the package states. Once it’s ready, drain it and let it cool.

Step 2: Combine The Salad

To a large mixing bowl, add the cooked and cooled pasta, olives, cherry tomatoes, banana pepper rings, green onions, feta cheese, seasonings, and any other mix-ins you want.

The great thing about this recipe is that you can add or substitute any of the ingredients. I’ve even heard people call this “everything but the kitchen sink” pasta salad since you can add anything according to your taste!

Step 3: Add The Dressing

Add approximately ¼-bottle of Italian dressing, then gently stir the salad until all the ingredients are well-coated and evenly distributed. Taste and add more dressing if you feel like it needs it.

Step 5: Chill The Salad

I recommend chilling this zesty Italian pasta salad in the fridge for 15 minutes before serving it. This allows the flavors to meld together and balance out.

What To Serve With Pasta Salad

Pair this zesty Italian pasta salad with other sides and barbecue staples for a full spread! Here’s a list of great ideas:

Recipe Variations

Gluten-free: For a gluten-free version, use your favorite gluten-free brand of pasta.
Vegan: To accommodate a vegan diet, simply omit the feta or use a dairy-free cheese alternative.
Southwest: Add corn and beans, and use a cilantro-lime dressing for a Southwest twist.
Pesto: Replace the Italian dressing with a pesto-based dressing instead.
Protein-packed: Add grilled chicken, tofu, pepperoni slices, or shrimp for a higher protein meal.
Grilled veggies: For unique flavors and textures, try adding sliced zucchini, squash, eggplant, onion, or bell peppers.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Cook to al dente: Cook the pasta to al dente to prevent the salad from becoming mushy.
Rinse the pasta: Make sure to rinse the pasta under cold water to stop the cooking process.
Drain the pasta: To avoid a watery pasta salad, remember to drain the pasta well.
Chill the salad: Chill the pasta salad in the fridge for at least 30 minutes before serving it so the flavors meld together.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have leftover zesty Italian pasta salad, just follow these simple storage tips:

Fridge: This pasta salad will last in an airtight container for up to 4-5 days in the fridge. Just keep it in an airtight container.
Freezer: Pasta salad isn’t freezer friendly since the pasta and veggies will change in texture once thawed.
Make ahead: It’s good to allow the salad to “marinate” a little before serving. All of the flavors will combine and mix with the other ingredients. Since veggies absorb liquids, don’t add as much dressing the night before. Wait until you are ready to serve, then add it to taste.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoy side dishes and appetizers, have a look at some of my other favorites like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

What type of Italian dressing should I use?

You can use your favorite Italian dressing from the store, or make your own by combining olive oil, white wine vinegar, honey, Dijon, and Italian seasonings.

Can I use a different type of cheese?

Yes, instead of feta, you can use goat cheese, blue cheese, cotija cheese, or cubed mozzarella.

Can I use a different salad dressing instead of Italian?

Yes, many dressings work on classic pasta salads instead of Italian. Some of my favorites include Greek vinaigrette, balsamic vinaigrette, or even Caesar dressing.

Quick & Easy Pasta Salad

Make this zesty Italian pasta salad for the perfect side dish to bring to potlucks, barbecues, and cookouts! Made in under 30 minutes, it’s full of fresh vegetables, tangy Italian dressing, and feta cheese. Plus, it couldn’t be easier to customize!

Course Side Dish

Cuisine American

Keyword easy side dish recipe, pasta, salad, Side Dish, summer recipes

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 10

Total Time 15

Servings people

Calories 273kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

1 pound tricolored rotini or other spiral shaped pasta noodle
3 ounces black olives sliced and drained (one small can)
¾ cup Italian dressing, plus more as needed storebought or homemade
1 pint cherry tomatoes
¼ cup banana pepper rings roughly chopped
1 bunch Green Onions chopped for garnish
1 cup feta Cheese crumbled, any flavor
2 teaspoons oregano dried
salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

Cook pasta according to package directions. Drain and let cool.*
To a large mixing bowl, add cooled pasta, olives, whole cherry tomatoes, banana pepper rings, chopped green onion, feta cheese, seasonings.
Stir gently to combine.
Add approximately 1/4 of the bottle of Italian dressing and stir.
Taste for flavor. Continue adding dressing as desired.
Place in the fridge until ready to serve.
Transfer to a serving platter and serve chilled.

Notes

*Spiral Noodles: I always use the multi-colored rotini noodles as they add a beautiful color, and the shape allows the dressing and flavors to get into each nook and cranny. BUT, you can use any hearty noodle you prefer.

Nutrition

The post Zesty Italian Pasta Salad appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Frozen Broccoli

Anna Kate — Thu, 16 Feb 2023 18:39:55 +0000

Learn how to make air fryer frozen broccoli with this quick and easy guide! In less than 10 minutes, open up the drawer to perfectly crispy and tender broccoli. It makes a great side dish, healthy snack, or lunch during busy weeks.

Cooking vegetables in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to use this incredible kitchen appliance. In fact, cooking food from frozen is actually one of the best ways to use an air fryer.

This is because it thaws the food as it preheats, and it always results in vegetables that are tender and crispy. The best part? You don’t even have to turn your oven on!

Why I Love This Recipe

Healthy: Frozen broccoli is full of vitamins and minerals like vitamin K, fiber, iron, and potassium. Plus, air frying means you don’t have to use as much oil.
Easy: This no-fuss dinner is perfect for busy weeknights when you don’t have the energy to make an extravagant meal. Just add broccoli to the air fryer and press start!
Quick: Cooking in the air fryer is much quicker compared to the oven or steamer basket. You don’t even have to wait for the air fryer to preheat!

Ingredients For Air Fryer Frozen Broccoli

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Frozen broccoli: For convenience, just use a package of store-bought frozen broccoli. If you have extra fresh broccoli heads on hand, cut them into florets and freeze them for air frying at a later date!
Olive oil: To prevent the broccoli from sticking to the air fryer basket. I prefer olive oil, but avocado oil, canola oil, or any other neutral vegetable oil will work.
Seasonings: I season the broccoli with garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper. This combination is zesty, savory, and hearty! Feel free to experiment with increased or decreased measurements to suit your preferences.

How To Cook Frozen Broccoli In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Toss the broccoli

In a large bowl, toss the broccoli florets with salt, garlic powder, onion powder, pepper, and olive oil. Make sure they are coated evenly!

Step 2: Air fry the frozen broccoli

Once it is coated in seasonings, place the broccoli in the air fryer. Air fry it at 370°F for 8-10 minutes, or until your desired tenderness and crispiness are reached.

Step 3: Toss the broccoli

At the halfway point, remove the basket and toss the broccoli to promote even cooking. Serve the broccoli while hot!

What To Serve With Air Fryer Frozen Broccoli

You can serve air fryer frozen broccoli as-is or with toppings like Parmesan cheese, cheese sauce, or chili flakes. Enjoy it as a side dish with prime rib, oven-roasted pork tenderloin, air fryer chicken breasts, or grilled pork chops.

For a more complete meal, pair it with other sides like air fryer sweet potatoes, crispy air fryer potatoes, mac and cheese, or crispy baked potatoes.

Recipe Variations

Buffalo: Toss the broccoli together with buffalo sauce, melted butter, and salt before adding it to the air fryer.
Lemon herb: Season the broccoli with olive oil, lemon juice, thyme, basil, and pepper.
Cheesy: Coat the broccoli with olive oil and shredded cheddar before air frying it.
Asian-style: Toss it in a mixture of soy sauce, sesame oil, honey, and cornstarch.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Don’t overcrowd: For optimal air circulation and crispiness, don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket. It’s better to cook in batches rather than stack the broccoli on top of one another.
Shake: Shake the basket halfway to flip the broccoli so the florets crisp up on all sides.
High heat: High heat in the air fryer is the best way to cook frozen broccoli. This causes them to crisp up rather than just steam.
Keep an eye on them: If it’s your first time cooking frozen broccoli in the air fryer, check on them early to ensure they don’t burn. Each air fryer varies slightly in terms of heat level and cooking time.
Season before cooking: If you decide to add any seasonings, it’s best to toss the broccoli in them before cooking.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have leftover air fryer frozen broccoli, follow these simple storage and reheating tips:

Fridge: Let the broccoli completely cool, then transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for 2-3 days.
Reheating: Reheat frozen broccoli in the air fryer at 370 degrees F for 3-4 minutes, making sure to flip them halfway through.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed learning how to cook frozen broccoli in the air fryer, take a peek at some more of my favorite air fryer recipes:

Frequently Asked Questions

How long does broccoli take in the air fryer?

Once you transfer the broccoli to the air fryer, it will take about 8–10 minutes at 370 degrees F. The broccoli should appear crispy on the outside but tender in the middle. Just remember to flip them halfway through so they brown evenly.

Why does my broccoli burn in the air fryer?

If your broccoli tends to burn in the air fryer, there is a good chance the temperature is too high or you’re cooking it for too long. Try reducing the cooking time by 1-2 minutes or the heat by 25 degrees F.

Is it unhealthy to cook vegetables in an air fryer?

No! Cooking broccoli in the air fryer is just as healthy as cooking it in the oven. You can make this dish even healthier by reducing the amount of oil used and limiting high-calorie sauces or toppings.

Easy Air Fryer Frozen Broccoli

Learn how to make air fryer frozen broccoli with this quick and easy guide! In less than 10 minutes, open up the drawer to perfectly crispy and tender broccoli. It makes a great side dish, healthy snack, or lunch during busy weeks.

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Side Dish Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, air fryer recipe, broccoli, vegetables, vegetarian

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 10

Total Time 15

Servings

Calories 96kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

12 ounces fresh or frozen broccoli florets
2 tablespoons olive oil
½ teaspoon garlic powder
½ teaspoon onion powder
½ teaspoon salt
¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

In a large bowl, toss broccoli with salt, garlic powder, onion powder, pepper, and olive oil.
Place broccoli into the air fryer basket. Air fry at 370°F for 8-10 minutes, or until desired tenderness is reached. Toss halfway through to promote even cooking.
Serve hot.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Frozen Broccoli appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Bagel Bites

Anna Kate — Mon, 07 Nov 2022 17:08:43 +0000

Crispy, cheesy air fryer bagel bites are a quick and easy snack that takes less than 10 minutes to make. Break open the box, pop them in the air fryer, and by the time your kids reach the table, they’ll already be done cooking!

Whether adult or child, I’ve yet to meet a person who doesn’t love bagel bites. Simple air fryer recipes save me a ton of time in my busy household, and this snack sits right up there as one of the easiest. It’s kid-approved, mom-approved, and perfect for hectic schedules!

Why I Love This Recipe

Quick: There aren’t many other snacks that take less time to make than air fryer bagel bites. Plus, cleanup is a breeze!
Easy: All you have to do is open a box and pop them in the air fryer. Very little effort is required to learn how to cook bagel bites in the air fryer.
Healthier: In terms of frozen foods, bagel bites actually contain decent amounts of protein and fiber, meaning more air fryer bagel bites for everyone!

Air fryer bagel bites

I think we can all agree that bagel bites are one of the most convenient, tastiest, and kid-friendly snacks out there. They are perfectly cheesy, chewy, and saucy — what’s not to love?

Air frying bagel bites takes the convenience factor to a new level, plus this handy appliance crisps them up in a flash!

Everyone loves a classic three-cheese bagel bite, but you can easily swap in cheese and pepperoni, cheese, sausage, and pepperoni, or mozzarella cheese flavors. You could even try making your own bagel bites from scratch!

As they say, when life gives you a busy schedule, make air fryer bagel bites.

What is the best way to clean an air fryer?

The biggest gripe I hear about air fryers is that they are difficult to clean. Well, not anymore! Follow these tips to quickly and efficiently clean your air fryer:

Let the air fryer cool for about 30 minutes before cleaning it, or at least until it’s cool enough to handle.
Submerge the air fryer insert in warm, soapy water. Avoid washing your air fryer insert in the dishwasher or leaving it submerged in boiling water for a long period of time.
To reach all the little nooks and crannies of the basket, use a skewer, toothpick, or soft bristle brush.
For the actual air fryer itself, use a damp kitchen cloth, microfiber cloth, non-abrasive sponge, and dish soap or baking soda to remove caked-on food and grease.
Use a lemon to cut the grease and get rid of any lingering odors that may be trapped in your air fryer.
Always avoid metal utensils, steel wool pads, abrasive sponges, or wire brushes with an air fryer. They will cause micro-scratches, ruining the non-stick coating for future uses.

Note: These are general tips, but it’s always best to read your specific air fryer’s instructions for the cleaning recommendations.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Bagel Bites

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Bagel bites: My favorite brand of bagel bites is Ore Ida, but use whichever one is available to you! I just think they have the best texture, flavor, and “crispability.” I went with a three-cheese flavor, but the cooking time is the same for all flavors.

How to Cook Bagel Bites In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Prepare The Air Fryer

Preheat the air fryer to 360 degrees Fahrenheit. Prepare the air fryer basket with nonstick cooking spray if needed.

Step 2: Add The Bagel Bites

Decide on the number of bagel bites you’ll need. I used 16, which is about two-thirds of a family-size box. But, adjust this number up or down depending on the size of your air fryer.

The great thing about bagel bites is that there is no need to thaw them! Place the frozen bagel pizza bites directly in a single layer in the preheated air fryer basket. Make sure they aren’t overlapping for optimal crispiness.

Step 3: Air Fry The Bagel Bites

Air fry the bagel bites at 360 degrees Fahrenheit for 4-6 minutes. You should start checking them around minute 4 of cooking since all air fryers cook slightly differently. If they are done to your liking, remove them at this point. If not, continue cooking for another few minutes.

Step 4: Serve

Carefully remove the air fryer bagel bite with a pair of tongs and serve immediately while they are warm, melty, and crispy!

Dips To Serve With Bagel Bites

Now that your bagel bites are hot and crispy, try dipping them in a sauce like Alabama white BBQ sauce, marinara, ranch, or hot sauce. If your kids are picky eaters, serve them with ketchup!

Recipe Variations

To make your air fryer bagel bites extra fancy, consider topping them with more cheese like aged cheddar, parmesan, or Gouda. If you’d like to add other pizza toppings, try finely diced onions, mushrooms, or peppers. Any of your usual pizza toppings will work here!

Tips For The Best Recipe

Texture: For a crispier bottom, cook bagel bites in the air fryer at 400 degrees F. If you’d prefer them to be a similar texture as with the microwave, cook them at 340 degrees F. After testing, I found the sweet spot for my liking to be right at 360 degrees F.
Cook time: Cook time may vary depending on the brand you use. I use the Ninja Foodi air fryer, and it takes 4-6 minutes at 360 degrees F. Test out different times to see what works best for your specific air fryer.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you manage to have leftover air fryer bagel bites, here’s what to do:

Fridge: Store the bagel bites in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
Reheat: Pop your bagel bites in the air fryer again, and cook them at 350 degrees F for about 2-3 minutes, or until warmed through.

Additional Recipes

Looking for more easy air fryer snacks and sides? Check out some of my most popular recipes:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I put foil in the air fryer?

Technically you can use foil in the air fryer. However, it’s best to check the user manual of your particular brand. Using aluminum foil can cause the air to poorly circulate, which causes unevenly cooked food. This is why I don’t recommend it.

Do I have to preheat my air fryer?

Although it’s not necessary to preheat your air fryer, most people recommend you do. It’s especially important with thick cuts of meat or frozen foods in order to achieve the crispy texture air fryers are known for.

Can you make bagel bites in the oven?

Yes, you can make bagel bites in the oven, but they’re almost twice as fast and just as crispy when cooked in the air fryer.

Crispy Air Fryer Bagel Bites

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword bagel bites, Pizza

Servings people

Calories 210kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

16 bagel bites

Instructions

Turn your air fryer to 360 °F degrees and allow to preheat for about 5 minutes. Spray the inside of the air fryer basket with nonstick cooking spray if needed.
Place the frozen bagel pizza bites in a single layer in the preheated air fryer basket.
Air fry bagel bites at 360 degrees F for 4-6 minutes. Start checking the bagel bites around the 4 minute mark since all air fryers cook differently.
Carefully remove the air fryer pizza bagels with a pair of tongs and serve.

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Bagel Bites appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Sweet Potato

Anna Kate — Fri, 28 Oct 2022 16:36:13 +0000

This air fryer sweet potato recipe is incredibly easy to make, and cooks up in less time than in a traditional oven! It’s crispy on the outside yet tender and creamy on the inside. Serve it as a side dish, or load it with toppings for a complete meal.

Just like regular air fryer potatoes, sweet potatoes are another addition to my ever-growing collection of air fryer recipes.

An air fryer is one of those kitchen appliances that really lives up to its name and makes cooking such a breeze! It’s more hands-off than an oven, heats up instantly, and the food comes out just as good (if not better). What’s not to love?

Why This Recipe Works

Time-saving: Save as much as 20 minutes by using the air fryer over a standard convection oven. Plus, no preheating is necessary.
Frees up the oven: While the sweet potatoes are in the air fryer, your oven is free to make other recipes to serve alongside it.
Simple: All you need is sweet potatoes, butter, and salt in this easy-to-make recipe.
Healthy: Sweet potatoes are packed full of vitamins and minerals, making them a perfectly healthy side to pair with proteins and other mains.

What Are The Best Sweet Potatoes For Air Frying?

With so many different varieties of sweet potatoes, I’ve narrowed down the best ones for air frying, plus which ones to avoid:

Orange skin and flesh: These varieties include Red Garnet or Jewel sweet potatoes. They seem to cook the best, leaving an almost caramelized skin and moist flesh. I prefer long and skinny potatoes to round and short ones because they cook more evenly.
Tan or purple skin: Potatoes like Sweet Hannah, Japanese, or Purple tend to dry out when they’re cooked in the air fryer. I don’t recommend these varieties for air frying.

Note: The term yam and sweet potato are often used interchangeably in North American grocery stores. True yams are very hard to find, have thicker skin, and are even more starchy than Purple sweet potatoes.

Ingredients For Air Fryer Sweet Potatoes

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Sweet potatoes: Look for sweet potatoes that are similar in size, which will help them cook more evenly. Also, avoid sweet potatoes with any discolorations, soft spots, deep gashes, etc.
Butter: Who can resist the combination of sweet potatoes and warm butter? The saltiness of the butter really brings out the sweetness of the potatoes. If you want, you can also use margarine, but I prefer real butter!
Seasonings: I kept things simple with just salt, but you can get creative with your seasonings (I’ve listed ideas in the variations section).

How to Make Sweet Potatoes In The Air Fryer

Step 1: Wash the potatoes

Wash the outside of however many potatoes you’ll be air frying. Make sure to scrub them thoroughly with a dish sponge or brillo pad to remove any dirt and debris from the skins.

Step 2: Air fry the sweet potatoes

Place the sweet potatoes inside your air fryer basket. Set it to 380F, and cook the sweet potatoes in the air fryer for 40 minutes.

You’ll know they are done when you can easily pierce through the center with a fork. The cook time may vary slightly depending on the size of your sweet potatoes.

Step 3: Add butter and seasonings

Split the potatoes in half, then season them with butter, salt, and any other seasonings that you enjoy!

How To Serve Air Fryer Sweet Potatoes

Just like oven-baked sweet potatoes, air fryer sweet potatoes make an excellent addition to a Thanksgiving or Christmas spread.

Serve them alongside a Crockpot turkey breast, spiral ham, green bean casserole, Southern cornbread dressing, turkey gravy, and homemade cranberry sauce for the ultimate feast!

Recipe Variations

Oven-baked: Although it takes a little longer, you can easily follow the same steps and bake the sweet potatoes in your oven.
Seasonings: In addition to salt, try cinnamon, garlic powder, cardamom, nutmeg, cumin, cayenne, paprika, turmeric, or garam masala.
Casseroles: Make single-serving sweet potato casseroles by adding brown sugar to the butter, and topping the potatoes with mini marshmallows or candied pecans.
Stuffed: Make stuffed sweet potatoes with ground chicken, spinach, melted cheese green onions, and sour cream.
Twice-baked: Scoop out the flesh of the sweet potatoes, and turn them into twice-baked sweet potatoes instead!

Tips For The Best Recipe

Poking is optional: Many people recommend poking sweet potatoes before air frying them, which is supposed to speed up the cooking process. I personally find this unnecessary and quite a lot messier. This is just a matter of preference.
Scrub, scrub, scrub: Since the skins won’t be peeled away, remember to give the sweet potatoes a thorough scrub and towel dry before placing them in the air fryer!
Adjust your temperature: All air fryers are slightly different, so you may need to adjust the temperature or cooking time a touch. Don’t worry though, it’s pretty difficult to overcook sweet potatoes.
Use foil: You can wrap the sweet potatoes in foil, which creates an extra tender texture and makes for an easy clean-up.

What To Do With Leftovers

Fridge: Once your sweet potatoes have cooled, store them in the fridge for up to 5 days.
Freezer: Transfer the sweet potatoes to a freezer-safe bag or container, and store them for up to 6 months in the freezer.
Reheat: Warm up your sweet potatoes in the air fryer at 400 degrees F for about 8-10 minutes.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed the simplicity of this air fryer sweet potato recipe, here are some more of my most popular air fryer recipes for you to try:

Frequently Asked Questions

How long does it take sweet potatoes to cook in the air fryer?

Sweet potatoes take about 40 minutes at 380 degrees F in the air fryer.

Do you have to soak sweet potatoes before air frying?

No, you don’t have to soak sweet potatoes before air-frying them. In fact, the dryer the sweet potato is, the better it will crisp up.

Why are my sweet potatoes not crispy in the air fryer?

If your sweet potatoes aren’t crisping up in the air fryer, it’s likely the cause of too much moisture. Once you wash your potatoes, make sure they are dry by patting them with a cloth. Next, ensure there is no overcrowding in the basket. Leave enough room for the air to properly circulate.

Easy Air Fryer Sweet Potato Recipe

Course Air Fryer Recipes, Side Dish Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword potato recipes, sweet potatoes

Cook Time 40

Total Time 40

Servings serving

Calories 146kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

sweet potatoes

Seasoning Ideas

salt
butter
Other seasoning as desired

Instructions

Place the sweet potatoes inside your air fryer basket. Set it to 380F, and cook the sweet potatoes in the air fryer for 40 minutes.
You’ll know they are done when you can easily pierce through the center with a fork. The cook time may vary slightly depending on the size of your sweet potatoes.
Split the potatoes in half, then season them with butter, salt, and any other seasonings that you enjoy!

Nutrition

Serving: 1pound | Calories: 146kcal

The post Air Fryer Sweet Potato appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Horseradish Sauce For Prime Rib

Anna Kate — Mon, 24 Oct 2022 15:15:14 +0000

This simple horseradish sauce for prime rib, steak, and tenderloin comes together in less than 5 minutes! It’s creamy, zesty, and refreshing, allowing the flavors of the meat to shine through. This versatile recipe should be in every home cook’s kitchen repertoire!

With the holidays fast approaching, I truly believe you need this horseradish sauce in your life! It perfectly accentuates premium cuts of meat without taking over the flavor. I swear it will have your guests ooh-ing and ahh-ing in no time!

Not only is this horseradish sauce for prime rib and other cuts of meat, but it can also be spread on bread, paired with vegetables, and so much more.

What Is Horseradish?

Horseradish is a spicy root vegetable, and not surprisingly, it’s in the same family as wasabi. Just like cauliflower and cabbage, horseradish is a cruciferous vegetable that is utilized all around the world as a spice or condiment.

While you might be able to find fresh horseradish in the produce section, it’s mainly sold as “prepared horseradish.” Typically, prepared horseradish is made from grated horseradish root, salt, and vinegar. It’s much easier to use than fresh horseradish, and a tiny scoop brings this sauce to life!

What Is Horseradish Sauce?

Horseradish sauce combines the pungent flavors of horseradish with ingredients like sour cream, apple cider vinegar, and fresh chives to create a creamy, zesty, and indulgent spread.

Ingredients For Creamy Horseradish Sauce

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Sour cream: Making up the majority of the sauce, sour cream creates the perfect balance of rich, cooling, and refreshing flavors. If you don’t have sour cream, replace it 1:1 with Greek yogurt.
Prepared horseradish: You should be able to find jars of prepared horseradish in the refrigerated section of your local grocery store. If you have the time, you can try making your own prepared horseradish!
Salt & pepper: Enhances the flavors of the sauce. Make sure to use kosher salt, or use a reduced amount of fine sea salt (about ¾ teaspoon fine sea salt to 1 teaspoon kosher salt).
Chives: For a fresh, herbaceous, and zesty taste with a pop of color. If you don’t have chives, substitute them with green onions.
Apple cider vinegar: Imparts just the right amount of tanginess. While I prefer apple cider vinegar, you can also use white vinegar or lemon juice.
Cayenne pepper: I like to add a pinch of cayenne for some heat. To make a milder sauce, omit it completely.

How to Make Horseradish Sauce

Step 1: Combine All Ingredients

It really couldn’t be easier or quicker to prepare this creamy horseradish sauce!

All you need to do is whisk together the sour cream, prepared horseradish, salt, black pepper, chives, cayenne pepper, and apple cider vinegar in a bowl.

Step 2: Chill The Sauce

Chill the horseradish sauce for at least an hour to allow the flavors to blend together.

What To Serve Horseradish Sauce With

Of course, the best meal to serve creamy horseradish sauce with is tender, juicy, and succulent prime rib. However, you can also pair it with other cuts of meat such as beef or pork tenderloin, pork chops, or steak.

For a little extra kick, add a spoonful to deviled eggs or on top of baked potatoes. You can even spread it over bread, or dip your favorite veggie sticks into it!

Variations

Mayonnaise: Add a tablespoon, or use half mayo and half sour cream for a richer flavor.
Worcestershire: This slightly sweet, umami-rich condiment helps round out the raw spice of horseradish.
Dijon mustard: Many recipes call for Dijon mustard. Add a teaspoon or two to see what you like best!
Hot sauce: Instead of cayenne pepper, add a few drops of your favorite hot sauce!
Sugar: To round out the spiciness, add a pinch or two of sugar.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Let the sauce chill: Once mixed, leave your horseradish sauce in the fridge so the punchiness has time to mellow out.
Use prepared horseradish: Quicker, easier, and milder, prepared horseradish imparts a better flavor profile than freshly grated horseradish root.
Taste & adjust: Everyone’s palate is different, especially when working with a bold ingredient like horseradish. Start slow, taste, and adjust the spiciness to your preference.

What To Do With Leftovers

For any leftover horseradish sauce, follow these simple storage tips:

Fridge: Keep horseradish sauce in the fridge for up to 1 week. If you omit the chives, it should last up to 3 weeks. I prefer using glass jars since they preserve the flavors best.
Freezer: If you’re unable to finish the sauce in time, add it to a freezer-safe bag or container, and freeze it for up to 3 months. The overall potency and texture may change slightly after thawing, but it’s better than wasting ingredients.

Additional Sauce Recipes

If you enjoyed this horseradish sauce for prime rib, try out a few more of my favorite sauce recipes:

Frequently Asked Questions

Is horseradish spicy?

Grated horseradish is spicy, but when it’s mixed with sour cream and apple cider vinegar, it is much more mellow and subdued.

Is horseradish similar to wasabi?

Horseradish and wasabi are different plants that come from the same family. Interestingly, most wasabi consumed outside of Japan is simply horseradish that’s been dyed with green food coloring.

Where can I buy horseradish?

You may be able to find fresh horseradish root at specialty Asian food markets, but most horseradish is “prepared” and sold in jars at major supermarkets.

Creamy Horseradish Sauce For Prime Rib

Course Condiments, Seasonings & Toppings

Cuisine American

Keyword dipping sauce, horseradish sauce, sauce for beef

Prep Time 5

Chill Time 1

Total Time 1 5

Servings servings

Calories 48kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Whisk
Mixing Bowls
32-ounce Mason Jars optional, for easy pouring and storage

Ingredients

1 cup sour cream
3 tablespoons prepared horseradish
¾ teaspoon kosher salt
¼ teaspoon black pepper
2 teaspoons thinly sliced chives
1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar
1 pinch cayenne pepper like ⅛ tsp

Instructions

Whisk together sour cream, horseradish, salt, black pepper, chives, cayenne pepper and apple cider vinegar together in a bowl. Chill for at least 1 hour to allow flavors to blend.
Serve with Prime Rib or other beef dish.

Nutrition

The post Horseradish Sauce For Prime Rib appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Lasagna Soup

Anna Kate — Tue, 11 Oct 2022 18:15:30 +0000

This easy lasagna soup is a warming, cozy, and comforting dish that’s great for cold weather months! The recipe features tender lasagne, Italian sausage, tomato broth, and creamy ricotta. It’s all the flavors everyone loves about traditional lasagna but served in a bowl!

This lasagna soup recipe is all about versatility. I love that I can swap ingredients around and use up whatever leftovers I have on hand. It’s so delicious, I’m even able to sneak vegetables in that slip right past the kids!

What Is Lasagna Soup?

Similar to a classic lasagna, lasagna soup is filled with many of the same ingredients and textural components. Lasagna noodles, ground meat (like Italian sausage), and three different kinds of cheese form the base of the recipe.

The main difference between the two is the sauce. Instead of a thick ragu, this deconstructed lasagna is surrounded by a rich and savory tomato-based broth. It’s perfect for chilly nights when you’re in the mood for comfort food!

The Best Pasta For Lasagna Soup

Technically speaking, any type of pasta will work for lasagna soup. However, the most typical variety is lasagne (also known as lasagna noodles). I like to break mine up into little pieces before cooking them.

Another great choice is mafalda since the shape is just like a miniature version of lasagne. Other options include rotini, farfella, and fusilli.

Ingredients For Lasagna Soup

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Lasagna noodles (lasagne): Any brand will work for this lasagna soup recipe. Keep in mind, you will need about ten noodles broken into bite-size pieces.
Olive oil: To sauté the onions, garlic, and sausage. If you don’t have olive oil, replace it with avocado oil, canola oil, or another mild vegetable oil.
Onion & garlic: I recommend yellow onion and fresh garlic for this recipe, but you can use white onions and garlic powder instead.
Italian sausage: I love the taste of mild Italian sausage, but you can go for hot Italian sausage if you prefer more spice! You can even add ground beef, turkey, or chicken.
Oregano & basil: Both dried oregano and basil add bright, herbaceous flavors. Italian seasoning works well too. For a pop of color, garnish this soup with fresh basil.
Tomato paste: To create a deep, rich, umami flavor in the broth.
Canned tomatoes: Add both crushed and diced tomatoes for a more full-bodied texture. If you only have diced tomatoes, just use an equivalent amount of those.
Beef broth: It’s best to use low-sodium beef broth since the sausage and cheese are salty as well. Although beef broth is the preferred choice, chicken broth works too.
Salt & pepper: Season with kosher salt and pepper to taste.
Parmesan rinds: While optional, simmering sauces and soups with Parmesan rinds is a common Italian practice to add layers of umami taste. Plus, it prevents wasting ingredients!
Ricotta & Parmesan: Combine ricotta and Parmesan for a creamy topping. If you’re feeling like an extra cozy meal, add some shredded mozzarella. It will melt as it sits on the soup, creating ooey-gooey strands of cheese.

How To Make Lasagna Soup

Step 1: Cook The Lasagne

Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Add the lasagne and cook according to the package directions. Once done, drain the pasta and toss it with a little olive oil. Set them aside while you prepare the rest of the soup.

Step 2: Cook The Onions & Sausage

In the meantime, heat the olive oil in a large Dutch oven or a heavy-bottomed pot over medium-high. Sauté the onions until softened, which should take a few minutes.

To the same pot, add the sausage and break it up with a wooden spoon. Continue cooking, stirring frequently, until the sausage is browned.

Step 3: Add Seasonings

Mix in the garlic, oregano, and basil, then add the tomato paste and cook for a few more minutes, or until the color darkens.

Step 4: Simmer The Soup

Add the beef broth, canned tomatoes, salt, and pepper. Drop in the Parmesan rinds and give everything a good stir. Cover the pot and simmer on low for about 30 minutes to deepen the flavors.

Step 5: Make The Ricotta Mixture

While the soup simmers, make the ricotta mixture by stirring the ricotta, Parmesan, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Set that aside until you’re ready to serve.

Step 6: Assemble The Soup

Stir in the cooked lasagne, then divide the soup among bowls.

Add a dollop of ricotta to the center of each bowl and garnish with sliced basil. Top with additional mozzarella or freshly shredded Parmesan for good measure!

What To Serve With Lasagna Soup

Serve this lasagna soup recipe as a meal on its own, or pair it with a garden salad, French bread, garlic bread, or Caesar salad. There are so many side dishes to choose from!

Recipe Variations

Change the protein: Try spicy Italian sausage, ground beef, turkey, or chicken.
Switch up the seasonings: Add dried parsley, sage, thyme, or rosemary. For an easier option, use an Italian seasoning mix.
Different cheese: Try provolone, Romano, mascarpone, or cottage cheese. You can even use cheddar cheese for another meltable option.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Cook the pasta separately: By cooking the pasta separately, it reduces the amount of starch in the soup to prevent a gummy texture.
Don’t fully cook the pasta: Drain the lasagna noodles with about 2-3 minutes left of cooking since they will finish cooking in the soup.
Simmer with Parmesan rinds: Adding a Parmesan rind or two to the simmering soup seriously changes the overall flavor. Don’t skip it!
Use a Dutch oven: Cooking the soup in a Dutch oven locks in moisture and retains heat extremely well.

What To Do With Leftovers

This lasagna soup recipe is incredibly easy to make ahead of time! All you have to do is prepare everything except the lasagne. When you’re ready to serve it, warm the soup up, cook the pasta, and add it in.

Keep the fully cooked soup in your fridge for up to 3-4 days. Pasta tends to turn a little mushy as it sits in the fridge so be prepared for that. With that said, I don’t recommend freezing this soup with lasagne in it as the texture will change too much.

More Pasta Recipes

If you’re a pasta lover like me, be sure to check out some more comforting recipes like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can you cook the pasta in the soup?

Although you can cook the pasta in the soup, it’s best to cook it separately. The pasta absorbs liquid and adds starch to the soup, which can make it thicker than you would like.

Can you make lasagna soup in an Instant Pot?

Yes, you can make this lasagna soup recipe in an Instant Pot. Add all of the ingredients to an Instant Pot, making sure pasta is at the bottom and submerged. Cook on high for 6 minutes followed by a quick release.

Easy Lasagna Soup

This easy lasagna soup is a warming, cozy, and comforting dish that’s great for cold weather months! The recipe features tender lasagne, Italian sausage, tomato broth, and creamy ricotta. It’s all the flavors everyone loves about traditional lasagna but served in a bowl!

Course Soup

Cuisine American

Keyword Dutch Oven, fall recipes, lasagna soup, soup

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 30

Total Time 40

Servings people

Calories 440kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

8 ounces lasagna noodles broken into pieces (about 10 noodles)
1 pound Italian sausage mild, ground
1 yellow onion large, diced
1 tablespoon olive oil
2 teaspoon oregano dried
2 teaspoon basil dried
4 cloves garlic minced
2 tablespoons tomato paste
14.5 ounces crushed tomatoes undrained
14.5 ounces diced tomatoes undrained
32 ounces beef broth
½ teaspoon salt
½ teaspoon black pepper
1-2 slices Parmesan rinds optional
Fresh basil chopped (for garnish)

For the Ricotta Mixture:

8 ounces ricotta
½ cup Parmesan cheese freshly grated
¼ teaspoon kosher salt
black pepper

Instructions

Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Add the noodles and cook according to package directions. Drain; drizzle with olive oil and toss. Set aside.
Meanwhile, heat 1 tablespoon olive oil in a large Dutch oven or heavy-bottomed pot over medium-high heat. Add the onion and saute, stirring, until softened, about 3 minutes.
To the same pot, add the sausage and cook, stirring and breaking up the sausage with a wooden spoon, until the sausage is browned, about 3 minutes.
Stir in the garlic, oregano, and dried basil.
Add the tomato paste and cook, stirring, until darkened, about 2 minutes.
Add the beef broth, tomatoes, and salt and pepper. Stir to combine.
Drop in the parmesan rinds and stir. Cover the pot and simmer on low for about 30 minutes.

Make the Ricotta Mixture

While the soup simmers, make the ricotta mixture: add the ingredients to a small bowl and stir to combine.

Assemble the Soup

Stir in the cooked noodles to the soup.
Then, divide the soup among bowls. Add a dollop of ricotta to the center of each bowl and garnish with sliced basil.
Top with additional mozzarella or fresh shredded parmesan if desired.

Nutrition

The post Lasagna Soup appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Crockpot Christmas Crack

Anna Kate — Tue, 04 Oct 2022 16:42:33 +0000

Crockpot Christmas crack is the simplest no-bake holiday treat! Roasted peanuts, dark and white chocolate, and festive sprinkles make these easy peanut clusters a family favorite.

Nothing says Christmas is coming like a plateful of almond bark peanut clusters. Plus, a limited amount of hands-on time is always a bonus when it comes to dessert!

The secret weapon in this Christmas candy recipe is the Crockpot. Yes, you heard that right — Crockpot candy! It makes life a breeze, which will give you more time to visit with friends and family this holiday season!

Why I Love This Recipe

Crowd-pleasing: Almond bark peanut clusters are easy to bring to parties, get-togethers, and other family events. Everyone will dive straight in when they see the plate coming their way!
Simple: This recipe is made with widely available and simple ingredients. Plus, you’ll have no problem following the detailed step-by-step instructions.
Kid-friendly: Not only do kids adore almond bark peanut clusters, but it’s so easy to get them involved in the cooking process.

What Is Crockpot Christmas Crack?

Crockpot Christmas crack is a traditional holiday candy recipe and for good reason. It’s easy to make, tastes delicious, and can be easily customized.

This peanut cluster recipe is made with a combination of German chocolate, semi-sweet chocolate, white chocolate, almond bark, and roasted peanuts. All you have to do is dump the ingredients into a slow cooker, melt them together, form mounds, and decorate the tops with holiday sprinkles.

Wait for the clusters to set, and you are ready to eat!

Ingredients For Crockpot Christmas Crack

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

German chocolate: Sweet, mild, and easily meltable, German chocolate is my top choice for Crockpot Christmas crack. If you can’t find any, use an equivalent amount of semi-sweet or bittersweet chocolate. If you use bittersweet, add a teaspoon of sugar for every ounce.
White almond bark: This can be found in packages, blocks, or round discs where candy and baking supplies are sold. White almond bark might be labeled as vanilla or white candy coating, so check for that as well.
Semi-sweet & white chocolate chips: Add both semi-sweet and white chocolate chips for the perfect balance of intense and bitter plus mild and sweet flavors.
Roasted peanuts: To add the perfect crunch. Use salted and unsalted roasted peanuts so the clusters don’t turn out overly salty!
Holiday sprinkles: Choose whichever colors and shapes you prefer, but make sure they are festive! Wilton makes a wide variety of holiday-inspired sprinkles.

How to Make Crockpot Christmas Crack

Step 1: Line the Crockpot

Lightly spray the Crockpot insert. You can also use a Crockpot liner if you have one.

Step 2: Cook Low and Slow

Add in all of the ingredients (except the sprinkles), then cover the Crockpot and cook on low for 1-2 hours. After the first hour, stir the mixture every 20 minutes or so.

Step 3: Form the Clusters

Once the candy mixture is ready, drop spoonfuls onto baking sheets lined with parchment paper. Stop after every 6 or so to add Christmas sprinkles.

If you have one, use a cookie scoop for this step to create evenly sized peanut clusters.

Step 4: Let the Clusters Set

Allow the candy to set for at least one hour in a cool place, preferably a refrigerator, until the chocolate has firmed up.

Serve immediately, or store the candy inside an airtight container in a cool area.

Recipe Variations

Different chocolate: Easily transform the flavors of these almond bark peanut clusters by swapping in different chocolate flavors like butterscotch, peanut butter, peppermint, espresso, caramel, toffee, or cinnamon.
Drizzled: In addition to sprinkles (or in place of), drizzle the tops of the clusters with melted white chocolate or milk chocolate.
Sprinkles: Use white, red, green, nonpareils, stars, candy, or even coarse sea salt to sprinkle the tops of the clusters.
Other nuts: For a completely new texture and taste, swap out the peanuts for macadamia nuts, almonds, walnuts, pecans, cashews, or hazelnuts.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Use a cookie scoop: For consistent peanut cluster sizes, I find it much easier to use a cookie scoop.
Stir the mixture: After the first hour, keep that chocolate moving! It will help melt it faster and prevent any of it from burning.
Know your slow cooker: Every slow cooker is different. Make sure you keep a close eye on the mixture, especially the first time around making this Crockpot Christmas crack recipe.
Use quality chocolate: Since there are so few ingredients in these almond bark peanut clusters, opt for high-quality German chocolate, semi-sweet chocolate, and white chocolate.
Line your slow cooker: For a quicker and easier cleanup, use a Crockpot liner if you have one on hand.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have any leftovers, store them in an airtight container in a cool, dark, and dry place. This will ensure they don’t melt. They will last for up to 5 days in the fridge.

Alternatively, you can freeze your Crockpot Christmas crack. They will last in the freezer for up to 3 months. I recommend thawing them in the fridge before biting into them to save on dentist bills!

Additional Sweet Recipes

For more holiday-inspired desserts, why don’t you try one (or all) of the following:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make Crockpot Christmas crack on the stovetop?

Yes, you can make this Crockpot Christmas crack recipe on the stovetop. Heat the mixture over low, making sure to stir constantly while the chocolate is melting to prevent burning.

Why do my peanut clusters have a white coating on them?

If your peanut clusters develop a white coating on them, they’re still safe to eat. This is called “chocolate bloom” and can be caused by moisture, improper storage techniques, or dramatic shifts in temperature.

Are almond bark peanut clusters gluten-free?

Yes, these almond bark peanut clusters are gluten-free. Make sure the chocolate you’re using is made in a gluten-free facility.

Crockpot Christmas Crack

Crockpot Christmas crack is the simplest no-bake holiday treat! Roasted peanuts, dark and white chocolate, and festive sprinkles make these easy peanut clusters a family favorite. Nothing says Christmas is coming like a plateful of almond bark peanut clusters. Plus, a limited amount of hands-on time is always a bonus when it comes to dessert!

Course Dessert Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword candy, Christmas, crockpot, dessert, no-bake dessert

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 2

Resting Time 1

Total Time 3 5

Servings pieces

Calories 484kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

4 ounces German sweet chocolate chopped into small pieces
1 pound white almond bark might be labeled as white candy coating chopped into small pieces
16 ounces semisweet chocolate chips
4 ounces white chocolate chips
1 pound roasted salted peanuts
1 pound roasted unsalted peanuts
holiday sprinkles to your taste

Instructions

Lightly spray (or use a crock pot liner) the crockpot insert and add in all the ingredients.
Cover and cook on low for 1-2 hours. After the first hour, stir the mixture every 20 minutes.
Drop spoonfuls of the candy mix onto baking sheets lined with parchment paper, stopping after every 6 or so to add Christmas sprinkles.
Allow candy to set for at least one hour in a cool place – preferably a refrigerator – until set.
Serve immediately, or store the candy inside an airtight container in a cool area.

Nutrition

The post Crockpot Christmas Crack appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Bisquick Sausage Balls

Anna Kate — Thu, 15 Sep 2022 16:53:47 +0000

Make the best Bisquick sausage balls in no time! These bite-sized beauties feature sharp cheddar cheese, ground sausage, and Bisquick. Serve them at holiday parties or on game day for a quick, easy, crowd-pleasing appetizer.

When a recipe requires just three ingredients, it’s always worth testing out! Thanks to the convenience of Bisquick, this simple sausage ball recipe will save you so much time in the kitchen.

It’s the perfect appetizer to make ahead of time and freeze. When you’re ready to serve it, just pop a batch in the oven and wait for your house to fill up with cheesy and delicious aromas.

Why I Love This Recipe

Quick & easy: All you need is 3 ingredients and 25 minutes to make this recipe.
Crowd-pleaser: I always get compliments on just how good these Bisquick sausage balls taste. I’m constantly giving out the recipe to friends and family!
Finger food: Bisquick sausage balls are ideal for busy holiday preparations or last-minute gatherings because they’re so easy to serve and eat.
Versatility: You can easily adapt this recipe to your taste preferences. Feel free to spice these Bisquick sausage balls up and pair them with your favorite dips.

What Are Bisquick Sausage Balls?

Bisquick sausage balls are one of my favorite recipes because you only need three simple ingredients — sausage, shredded cheddar, and Bisquick. Think meatball meets cheese biscuit. Is your mouth watering yet?!

If you’re unfamiliar with Bisquick, it’s a mixture of flour, baking powder, sugar, salt, and shortening. It was invented back in the 30s to make recipes like this more convenient and time-efficient.

All you need to do is mix the ingredients in a bowl, roll them into balls, and bake them in the oven for about 20 minutes. Talk about an easy way to impress your guests!

What is the best pork sausage to use?

When it comes to Bisquick sausage balls, your choice of pork plays an important role. You want them to be moist and tender, yet sturdy enough to hold up for dipping.

Raw, ground pork is the best choice. Typically, pork bought at the supermarket contains around 15% fat. If you prefer more flavor, sausage-grade pork is a great option. Extra-lean sausage can be used as well, but you may have a harder time getting the mixture to stay together.

Ingredients For Bisquick Sausage Balls

Bisquick: I’m using the original Bisquick from Betty Crocker, but there are other brands like Jiffy baking mix. If you don’t have any on hand, make your own with 2 cups of flour, 1 tablespoon of baking powder, 2 tablespoons of butter or shortening, and ½ teaspoon of salt.
Sharp cheddar cheese: For the most flavor, use aged cheddar cheese. It adds just the right amount of savory and umami elements to these Bisquick sausage balls. Try to stay away from pre-grated cheese as it can lead to a dry, crumbly mixture.
Ground pork sausage: This can be mild or spicy depending on your taste preferences. For a lighter version, try turkey or chicken sausage.
Milk: If the mixture seems dry, add milk little by little until it reaches a moist consistency that is easy to roll. You can use any type of milk you prefer here.

How To Make Bisquick Sausage Balls

Step 1: Mix the ingredients

While your oven is preheating to 350 degrees F, combine the ground sausage, Bisquick, and shredded cheddar cheese in a large mixing bowl.

If the mixture is too dry or crumbly, add a little milk at this point until it sticks together.

Step 2: Shape The Balls

Shape the mixture into bite-size balls, then spread them out evenly on a few baking sheets. You should get about 24 sausage balls from this recipe, but it depends on the exact size of your scoop.

If you have a cookie scoop, I highly recommend using it for even sizing and cooking time.

Step 3: Bake

Bake the sausage balls for about 20 to 25 minutes, or until they appear golden brown and the sausage is cooked. Serve them immediately while warm!

What To Serve With Bisquick Sausage Balls

While I do think Bisquick sausage balls are scrumptious on their own, you can turn them into an absolute show-stopper with some dips and sauces like the following:

Alabama white BBQ sauce
Ketchup
Regular BBQ sauce
Chili sauce
Honey-mustard or hot mustard
Garlic aioli
Ranch dressing

Recipe Variations

Gluten-free: If you need to make a gluten-free or low-carb version, Betty Crocker has options available for these as well.
Spices: Shake things up with different seasonings like Italian seasoning, paprika, cayenne, chives, Creole seasoning, or taco seasoning.
Cheese: While I prefer the taste of sharp cheddar in this recipe, test out other varieties like Gouda, Manchego, Colby, or even mozzarella for a more mild flavor.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Avoid pre-grated cheese: Freshly grated cheddar cheese will provide a lot more moisture to the Bisquick mixture than pre-grated cheese. Try to avoid it if possible.
Warm the sausage: Bring the ground sausage to room temperature before combining it with the Bisquick and cheese. This will release some of the grease and make mixing easier.
Wet your hands: To prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands, wet them with a little water before rolling the sausage balls.
Check the consistency: After mixing, make a test ball to see if it holds up. If not, add milk a tablespoon at a time until it sticks together.
Batch size matters: Keep your sausage balls uniform in size. This ensures even cooking and prevents some from being undercooked or overcooked.
Space them out: On the baking sheet, make sure the balls are spaced apart. This allows hot air to circulate around each ball, ensuring even browning.
Cook the pork safely: Use a meat thermometer to ensure the pork reaches a safe temperature. For ground meats, 160 degrees F is recommended by the USDA.
Chill before baking: If time allows, chill the formed balls in the refrigerator for about 30 minutes before baking. This helps them maintain their shape, resulting in a better texture.

How to Store Leftovers

If you have leftover Bisquick sausage balls, follow these simple storage tips:

Fridge: Transfer the baked sausage balls to an airtight container. They will keep for 3 to 4 days in the fridge this way.
Freezer: Once cooled, transfer the sausage balls to a freezer-safe bag or container. If stored properly, they will keep for up to 3-4 months.
Reheating: Cooked Bisquick sausage balls can be reheated again in the oven or microwave until warm. They won’t turn out quite as moist and tender, but they are still delicious.

Can Bisquick Sausage Balls be Made in Advance?

To save time on the day of cooking, you can prep these Bisquick sausage balls beforehand. Mix and shape the balls, then freeze them on a parchment-lined pan until firm.

Transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container, and keep them frozen for up to 1-2 months. If you’ll be serving them within 1-2 days, you can store them in the fridge.

When you’re ready to serve them, sausage balls can be baked straight from frozen. Just remember, you may need to tack on 5-10 minutes of bake time.

Additional Appetizer Recipes

Make an entire appetizer spread by serving these Bisquick sausage balls with other snacks and finger foods like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Why are my Bisquick sausage balls dry?

Dry Bisquick sausage balls are commonly caused by a high ratio of Bisquick to sausage. Make sure you follow the measurements exactly as written. If you’re still having issues, add a little milk or more sausage.

Why are my sausage balls greasy?

Using high-fat content sausage or overly oily cheese can make the balls greasy. Opt for a sausage with moderate fat content or balance it out with other ingredients.

Why are my sausage balls not sticking together?

If your sausage balls are crumbly or falling apart, it’s likely because you used packaged shredded cheese or low-fat sausage. Add milk to make the mixture moist.

The mixture is too sticky to shape. What can I do?

If the mixture is overly sticky, you can refrigerate it for a bit to firm up or add a tad more Bisquick. But be careful not to add too much to avoid dry sausage balls.

How do I tell if the sausage balls are cooked?

The most accurate way to tell if the sausage balls are cooked is to use a meat thermometer, which should read 160F. Alternatively, you can break a sausage ball open around the 20-minute mark to ensure there is no longer pink in the middle.

My Bisquick sausage balls are hard. What went wrong?

Overbaking or setting the oven temperature too high can cause the balls to develop a hard crust. Always ensure your oven is calibrated correctly and watch the cooking time.

3-Ingredient Bisquick Sausage Balls

Course Appetizer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword crowd pleasing recipes, holiday appetizers, holiday recipes, party food, Party recipes, quick recipe, sausages

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 20

Total Time 25

Servings sausage balls

Calories 179kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

2 cups Bisquick
4 cups sharp cheddar Cheese
1 pound ground pork sausage mild or spicy
¼ cup milk only if needed

Instructions

Preheat your oven to 350°F degrees.
In a large bowl, combine the ground sausage, bisquick and shredded cheese.
Form into 24 golf ball sized balls and place on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.
Bake in the preheated oven for 20 to 25 minutes, until golden brown and the sausage is cooked through entirely.
Remove and serve hot!

Nutrition

The post Bisquick Sausage Balls appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Crispy Air Fryer Potatoes

Anna Kate — Wed, 14 Sep 2022 19:22:50 +0000

Air fryer potatoes are the easiest side dish and perfect for a weeknight dinner! All you have to do is toss baby red potatoes with olive oil and seasonings, then pop them in the air fryer. You’ll end up with crispy yet tender potatoes in under 20 minutes.

I don’t know if it’s just me, but the easiest recipes almost always end up tasting the best. There’s just something about minimal prep work and cleanup that gets me every time!

Air fryer potatoes are the perfect side dish to serve alongside your favorite proteins and salads, making weeknight dinners a breeze. This side dish would be delicious served with a pot roast, roasted chicken, or other protein. You could even serve this side with a little garlic butter for dipping!

Why I Love this Recipe

Quick & easy: This simple recipe is ready in less than 30 minutes from start to finish.
Customizable: Add your favorite seasonings, choose different potatoes, or make it oil-free. The options are endless!
Affordable: The only required ingredients for this recipe are easily accessible and affordable in most places.
Healthy: Full of vitamins and minerals, air fryer potatoes can be part of a well-balanced and healthy diet.
Diet-friendly: This recipe is vegetarian/vegan-friendly and gluten-free.

What are the best potatoes for air frying?

You really can’t go wrong with air frying most varieties of potatoes, but there are some that are better than others.

Baby potatoes, also known as new potatoes, are the young form of regular-sized potatoes. Since they are harvested early, they contain a higher sugar content, making them ideal for roasting and air frying. Here are a few of the top choices:

Baby gold: Due to the high sugar and low starch content, baby gold potatoes are among the best for air frying. They turn a beautiful golden brown, crisp up perfectly on the outsides, and stay creamy on the insides.
Baby red: Baby red potatoes contain more sugar and less starch than baby golds, meaning they crisp up even more! Similarly, the insides remain creamy and delicious.
Baby russet: Baby russet potatoes also work well for air frying. They turn fluffy and soft on the insides with similar crispiness on the outsides to baby red and gold. The flavor is milder, but they are still a great option!

Benefits of the air fryer

Saves time: No more long preheating times! Plus, the overall cook time is much less than in conventional ovens.
Crisps better: An air fryer will crisp up the outside of the potatoes perfectly while leaving the insides creamy, buttery, and soft.
Easy cleanup: Air fryers are simple to clean with a little soap, a sponge, and some water. Most models are non-stick and even dishwasher-safe!
Healthier than frying: Air frying is much healthier than deep frying. It reduces calories by almost 80% due to the limited amount of oil required in the cooking process.

My Favorite Air Fryer: Ninja Foodi Pressure Cooker, Slow Cooker, & Air Fryer

Ninja FD401 Foodi 12-in-1 Deluxe XL 8 qt. Pressure Cooker & Air Fryer that Steams, Slow Cooks, Sears, Sautés, Dehydrates & More, with 5 qt. Crisper Basket, Deluxe Reversible Rack & Recipe Book, Silver: Home & Kitchen

View Product on Amazon

Ingredients For Air Fryer Potatoes

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Baby red potatoes: Sometimes labeled as “creamer” potatoes, baby red potatoes are my preferred choice. The next best options are baby gold potatoes, baby russet potatoes, or fingerling potatoes.
Olive oil: To toss the potatoes in, providing a crispy exterior. Opt for a high-quality extra-virgin olive oil whenever possible. If you don’t have olive oil, use avocado oil or sunflower oil instead.
Salt & pepper: Potatoes require a generous level of salt, so don’t worry about overseasoning them. Cracked black pepper adds just the right amount of bite.
Garlic & onion powder: I personally love the savory flavors of garlic and onion powder together. Feel free to mix up the seasonings to suit your taste. Try rosemary, thyme, or other dried herbs.

How to Make Air Fryer Potatoes

Step 1: Wash & season

Wash and dry the baby potatoes, then place them in a large mixing bowl. Drizzle them with olive oil, and sprinkle with salt, pepper, garlic powder, and onion powder.

If you are using any other fresh herbs or spices, you can add them at this point as well.

Step 2: Air fry the potatoes

Set the temperature of your air fryer to 400°F, then add the potatoes to the air fryer basket in a single layer. Cook the potatoes for 20 minutes, making sure to remove the basket and shake it at the halfway point.

Continue air frying the potatoes for the remaining 10 minutes, or until they are fork-tender.

Step 3: Serve the potatoes

Immediately transfer the cooked potatoes to a serving bowl, and enjoy while warm!

What To Serve With Air Fryer Potatoes

Air fryer potatoes make a delicious accompaniment alongside proteins like pork tenderloin, chicken breast, boneless prime rib, pulled pork, or dry rub ribs.

Serve them with a green bean casserole or salads like Caprese, Caesar, pasta salad, or spinach salad with warm bacon dressing for a complete meal.

Recipe Variations

Infused oil: Try using infused olive oil like rosemary, sage, garlic, or chili in place of regular olive oil.
Different herbs & spices: Switch up the flavors with seasonings like cumin, coriander, curry powder, turmeric, smoked paprika, cayenne, rosemary, sage, oregano, dill, chives, or thyme.
Potato varieties: Instead of baby red potatoes, try baby sweet potatoes. The total cook time may be slightly longer.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Cook in a single layer. Although this largely depends on the model of your air fryer, but for the crispiest results, make sure the potatoes are air fried in a single layer. Cook them in batches if need be.
Preheat the air fryer. Preheat the air fryer for a few minutes while you’re washing and seasoning the potatoes. Although not entirely necessary, it helps reduce overall cooking time for most air fryers.
Coat the potatoes evenly. Toss the potatoes thoroughly with olive oil in a mixing bowl. This will ensure the skins turn out evenly crisped and seasoned.

What To Do With Leftovers

Fridge: Keep cooked potatoes in the fridge for up to 5 days in an airtight container.
Freezer: Cooked potatoes can be stored in the freezer for up to 6 months. Make sure they have completely cooled, then transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container.
Reheat: You can air fry potatoes again at 400 degrees F for 10 minutes, checking to see if they have heated all the way through at the 8-minute mark.

More Air Fryer Recipes

If you enjoyed these air fryer potatoes, you need to try some more of my flavor-packed recipes made in this wonder appliance:

Frequently Asked Questions

Do I have to preheat the air fryer?

For the most consistent cook time and evenly cooked potatoes, you can preheat the air fryer for about 3-5 minutes. If your particular air fryer heats up quickly, don’t worry about preheating it.

Should I soak potatoes in water before air frying them?

No, it’s not necessary to soak potatoes in water before air frying them.

Why aren’t my potatoes crispy?

Your potatoes may not be crispy enough for one of two reasons. Firstly, you may need to cook them longer. Secondly, ensure the potatoes have time to dry prior to air frying, especially if you’re using a watery variety.

Crispy Air Fryer Potatoes

Course Side Dish

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, air fryer recipe, potato recipe, potatoes, red potatoes

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 20

Total Time 25

Servings people

Calories 23kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

1.5 pounds new potatoes also labeled as “creamer” potatoes, these are about 1 inch in diameter.
1 tablespoon olive oil
1 teaspoon kosher salt
½ teaspoon black pepper
1 teaspoon garlic powder
1 teaspoon onion powder

Instructions

Wash and dry potatoes. Place them in a large bowl and drizzle on olive oil and sprinkle with salt, pepper, garlic powder, and onion powder.
Add potatoes to the air fryer. Set temperature to 400 degrees. Set timer to 20 minutes. Press start. At 10 minute mark, halfway through cooking, remove the basket and shake. Place the basket back in air fryer and cook the remaining 10 minutes.
Place cooked potatoes in serving bowl. Serve immediately.

Nutrition

The post Crispy Air Fryer Potatoes appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Oven Roasted Pork Tenderloin Recipe

Anna Kate — Wed, 17 Aug 2022 18:22:10 +0000

The best pork tenderloin recipe you will ever make! Oven-roasted pork tenderloin is infused with sage, garlic, and rosemary. Seared for a savory crust, then roasted in the oven for a tender, juicy bite that melts in your mouth. Drizzle with a decadent, buttery pan sauce to elevate your weeknight meal! This quick and easy dinner takes less than 30 minutes to make, yet it’s still perfect for a date night at home or a beautiful dinner with family.

This roasted pork tenderloin has a crispy, caramelized crust with a tender, juicy interior that you won’t be able to get enough of! Prepared with a simple dry rub and served with a buttery sauce, everyone will be asking you for the recipe!

I’m a firm believer that you don’t need to be a professionally trained chef to prepare perfectly cooked meat. I’ll show you how easy it is to turn a restaurant-quality meal into your new go-to family favorite for busy weeknights.

What is Pork Tenderloin?

Pork tenderloin is a boneless, “extra lean” cut of meat with an excellent nutritional profile. It’s extremely tender (hence the name), which makes cooking a breeze. Plus, it can easily be seasoned in a wide variety of ways.

One of my favorite ways to prepare pork tenderloin is to sear and roast it. Searing pork tenderloin is the best way to get that crusty outer layer that locks in juices and tons of flavor!

I went with a simple yet flavor-packed rub, blending sage, garlic, onion, and paprika. With the addition of fresh rosemary, the only thing that may rival the taste is the cozy smell that fills your kitchen!

Pork Tenderloin vs Pork Loin

You may have heard pork tenderloin called by other names such as pork fillet or pork tender. But, none of these three are the same as pork loin. In fact, tenderloin and loin are two completely different cuts of meat, each requiring its own cooking method.

Tenderloin: This cut comes from the muscle along the backbone. It’s long, narrow, and boneless. Compared to loin, it has a more mild, lean flavor.
Pork loin: Sometimes called rib roast, pork loin is a larger, fattier cut that comes either boneless or bone-in. It carries a richer flavor with a tender texture.

In this recipe, we’re roasting pork tenderloin! If you are unsure which type you’re buying, make sure to double-check with the butcher.

Pork Tenderloin Internal Temperature

Pork is a little finicky to prepare. Undercooking can lead to illness while overcooking will lead to tough, flavorless meat.

Many folks insist that you must cook all pork until it reaches 145 degrees internally. However, this preparation method removes the pork from the oven at a much lower temperature. As the meat rests, the internal temperature continues to rise. This is called “carry-over cooking”.

Carry-over cooking occurs when the ingredients are removed from the heat source (oven, grill, skillet, etc.), but the cooking continues as the temperature is released from the meat.

Depending on the recipe, the internal temperature of the food can increase by 5-25 degrees in a matter of minutes during carry-over cooking. This method is 100% safe and the risk of foodborne illness is no more than any other preparation method.

Depending on the weight and thickness of your pork tenderloin and how you like your meat prepared, you may choose to roast it a little longer or allow it to rest longer than noted. Please see the notes in the recipe card below!

With all of that said, this is where a meat thermometer comes in handy! Seriously, it will make life so much easier.

Ingredients For Roasted Pork Tenderloin

See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

Pork: It’s important to use an already-tender cut of pork since it won’t be roasted for very long. This is why cuts that come from higher up on the animal, such as pork tenderloin, are the ideal choice for quick-roasting recipes like this.
Dry rub: I like to make a simple homemade rub seasoning. Garlic powder, onion powder, and sage add savory elements while paprika provides a touch of smokiness.
Fresh garlic: Pop a few cloves of fresh garlic into the skillet before roasting the pork tenderloin for extra hearty, savory notes.
Butter & olive oil: I sear my pork tenderloin in both butter and olive oil for richer flavors. For a lighter version, stick to only olive oil. Butter also makes up part of the serving sauce, creating an incredibly decadent meal.
Rosemary: Paired with sage, the fresh rosemary adds yet another layer of herbaceous, earthy flavors that make this dish feel cozy and comforting.

How to Cook Roasted Pork Tenderloin

Step 1: Mix the Rub

Before you start anything else, make sure your oven is preheating to 450°F degrees. Since the pork tenderloin only roasts for about 10 minutes, the temperature is high and hot!

Once the oven is on, mix together the garlic powder, onion powder, dried sage, salt, and paprika in a small bowl.

Step 2: Season the Pork

Sprinkle the rub on all sides of the pork tenderloin, turning and pressing the mixture into the meat so it adheres well. I recommend applying the rub in a 9×13 casserole dish for easier clean-up.

Make sure you really work the rub into the meat so it is evenly coated and seasoned well.

Step 3: Sear the Tenderloin

In a large cast-iron skillet over medium-high heat, melt one tablespoon of butter with the olive oil. If you don’t have a cast-iron skillet, make sure whatever pan you are using is oven-safe. Otherwise, you will need to sear and roast it in separate dishes.

You only need to sear the pork tenderloin on each side for a few minutes. It should appear golden brown in color.

Step 4: Roast the Pork Tenderloin

Once the meat is seared, it is ready to be roasted! Before you pop it in the oven, add the fresh garlic cloves, more butter, and sprigs of rosemary to the skillet.

If your pork tenderloin is similar in size to mine (1 ¼ pound), it only needs to be roasted for 10 minutes uncovered.

If you have a larger cut, you may need to roast it for a few minutes longer, but check the internal temperature with a meat thermometer so it reads to your desired doneness. Remember, we will have a fair amount of carry-over cooking as we are roasting at such a high temperature.

Once the pork tenderloin is done, let it rest at room temperature for 10 minutes before slicing. The resting period gives the meat juices time to redistribute, ensuring you will have tender and juicy pork tenderloin all throughout.

The internal temperature will continue to rise during resting. The longer you allow the meat to rest, the higher the temperature will climb. I prefer slicing at around 130°F.

Step 5: Make the Sauce

Transfer the pork out of the skillet to a welled cutting board or plate, then place the skillet back onto your stove. Without cleaning the skillet out (that’s where the flavor comes from), add the rest of the butter.

Gently scrape the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon to lift all of the browned bits or “fond” and incorporate them into the sauce. The rosemary leaves will usually come right off. Be sure to remove the stems before serving.

Depending on your stove and pan, you may need to turn the heat to low to get the butter to melt faster. This is an absolutely delicious sauce that makes the meal!

Step 6: Slice and Serve

After the pork tenderloin has rested, slice the meat into ½-inch thick slices and serve it with the sauce drizzled over top.

Serving Suggestions

For a well-rounded meal, this roasted pork tenderloin pairs incredibly well with savory side dishes like the following:

Tips For The Best Recipe

Invest in a thermometer. If I could give only one piece of advice, it would be to use a meat thermometer. Take the guesswork out of cooking your pork, and use a thermometer for the most consistent, safe, and accurate results.
Let the meat rest. As I mentioned, giving the pork tenderloin enough time to rest will allow the juices to redistribute and not spill out when you go to slice it.
Do not overcook. Pork is an especially important type of meat to not overcook. It will turn dry and tough very quickly. Monitor the internal temperature, and don’t let it cook too much past 145 degrees F for the most buttery texture.
Sear the pork. To lock in the juices and add a beautiful crust, don’t skip searing your pork tenderloin before roasting it! It only takes an additional 5-8 minutes.

Storage & Leftovers

If you have leftover pork tenderloin, here are some storage tips and tasty ways to use up leftovers:

Fridge: Store pork tenderloin in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days.

Freezer: Once cooled, I recommend wrapping your tenderloin in plastic wrap and placing it into a freezer-safe bag.

Reheating: If frozen, transfer the meat to the fridge to thaw overnight. Then, heat a little oil in a pan over low-medium, add the pork tenderloin, and cover until warm. You may need to flip it a few times for it to properly heat through, depending if it’s whole or sliced.

Leftovers: You can use leftover pork in chillis, tacos, fried rice, sliced for sandwiches, or paired with a fresh side dish.

Additional Recipes

For more protein-packed recipes, be sure to check out some of these fan favorites:

Frequently Asked Questions

Is it okay to eat pork tenderloin if it’s a little pink?

Yes. As long as the pork has been properly prepared to a safe internal temperature, a little pink in the middle is safe to eat.

Which herb is best to season pork with?

Although many herbs and spices pair well with pork, the combination of rosemary, sage, and paprika is one of my favorites.

How long does it take to cook pork tenderloin?

That answer largely depends on the size of your pork tenderloin and oven temperature. The best bet is to rely on the internal temperature of the meat rather than a rigid cook time.

Oven Roasted Pork Tenderloin Recipe

This oven-roasted pork tenderloin recipe is perfect for a date night at home or a beautiful dinner with family. Infused with sage, garlic, and rosemary, the pork is seared for a savory crust, then roasted in the oven for a tender, juicy result that melts in your mouth. Drizzle with a decadent, buttery pan sauce to elevate your weeknight meal! This quick and easy dinner takes less than 30 minutes to make, yet it’s still perfect for a date night at home or a beautiful dinner with family.

Course Main Course

Cuisine American

Keyword butter, cast iron recipe, garlic, oven roasted, pork tenderloin, roasting, rosemary, searing

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 10

Resting Time 10

Total Time 25

Servings servings

Calories 196kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

1 ¼ pound pound pork tenderloin, at room temperature (These usually come in a pack of two. Use only one tenderloin)
1 teaspoon garlic powder
1 teaspoon salt
1 teaspoon onion powder
1 teaspoon dried sage
1 teaspoon paprika
6 tablespoons butter divided
1 tablespoon olive oil
4 cloves garlic minced
2 sprigs fresh rosemary

Instructions

About 30 minutes before cooking, allow the meat to rest at room temperature for 30 minutes. This will prevent dry, tough meat.
Preheat the oven to 450°F degrees.
In a small bowl, mix together the garlic powder, onion powder, sage, salt, and paprika. Whisk to combine.
Sprinkle the rub on all sides of the pork tenderloin, turning and pressing the mixture into the meat so it adheres well. (Do this in a 9×13 casserole dish for easier clean-up!)
In a large cast iron skillet, melt one tablespoon of butter with the olive oil over medium-high heat.
Once hot, add the tenderloin to the skillet and sear on each side (about 3 minutes each side), until golden brown. This should take about 5-8 minutes total.
After searing, turn the stove off. Add the garlic cloves, 3 tablespoons of butter, and rosemary sprigs to the skillet. Place the skillet in the oven (uncovered) and roast for 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes, remove from the oven and transfer the pork tenderloin to a cutting board with a well or a serving platter. Allow the meat to rest at room temperature for 10 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches your desired doneness when read with a meat thermometer.
While the pork tenderloin is resting, make the pan sauce (optional).

To Make the Pan Sauce:

Without cleaning the cast iron skillet, add 2 tablespoons of butter to the skillet with the rosemary sprigs still remaining in the pan. (the pork tenderloin should be resting on a separate dish).
Gently melt the butter in the hot pan and scrape up the browned bits from the bottom of the skillet with a wooden spoon. Remove the rosemary stems when the sauce is complete.
After the pork tenderloin has rested for 10 minutes (or reaches desired doneness), slice the meat into ½-inch thick slices and serve with the sauce drizzled over the top.

Notes

Even after roasting and resting, the pork may have a little pink in the center. It is perfectly safe to eat as long as you have used an internal meat thermometer to check for the proper doneness.

When I prepare this dish, the internal temperature immediately upon removing the pork from the oven reads at about 110-115°F. After resting for 10 minutes, the internal temperature will rise to around 125-130°F.

If you prefer your pork to reach 145°F before serving, roast for an extra 5 minutes and then rest for a total of 10-15 minutes. A meat thermometer will help you determine your desired doneness much easier than cutting into the meat.

Nutrition

The post Oven Roasted Pork Tenderloin Recipe appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Green Bean Casserole

Anna Kate — Mon, 15 Aug 2022 16:37:12 +0000

Make a delicious green bean casserole from scratch! This comforting Southern side dish is made with a creamy homemade mushroom sauce and canned green beans, then topped with crispy fried onions. It’s the perfect addition to all your Thanksgiving and Christmas gatherings.

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Versatile: This green bean casserole can be made with canned, fresh, or frozen green beans. You can easily tailor it to your preference or what’s available in your kitchen.
Easy to make: Even though this recipe has a homemade mushroom cream sauce, it couldn’t be easier to put together. It makes such a difference in the final flavor!
Crowd-pleasing: Hearty flavors and comforting textures make this Southern green bean casserole a hit at any gathering! It’s the kind of dish that both kids and adults rave about, making mealtime fuss-free for everyone.

Instead of canned cream of mushroom soup, this recipe is made with a homemade mushroom sauce. It is not difficult to make, so don’t let that intimidate you.

It’s a simple roux with sautéed cremini mushrooms, shallots, and crunchy water chestnuts, all pulled together with a smooth sauce made of butter, flour, milk, and Parmesan cheese. Plus, don’t forget those delicious French’s Fried Onions. I’ll admit, I always sample a few while I put this casserole together!

While this recipe is similar to the original Campbell’s Green Bean Casserole, it’s kicked up a notch with homemade sauce, added mushrooms and water chestnuts, and a few other seasonings.

The Best Green Bean Casserole Recipe

When Thanksgiving and Christmas rolls around, everyone wants to see this green bean casserole on the table! It’s a favorite holiday side dish for so many families, and if it’s going to be a staple, let’s make it better than the original, shall we?

You are missing out if you’ve never had a homemade green bean casserole! I know this is certainly not an original recipe, but it’s the way I make it every year for Thanksgiving and it’s always the first to go!

It’s such an easy recipe to make and always delicious! Plus, you’ll love that this green bean casserole can be prepared ahead of time and even reheats well!

Ingredients For A Green Bean Casserole

Green beans: This recipe is made with canned green beans. If preferred, frozen or fresh can also be used. Make sure to fully thaw and drain frozen green beans. You will also likely need more seasoning for that ingredient swap.
Mushrooms: Fresh cremini mushrooms add an earthy flavor and hearty texture. Baby bellas, oyster mushrooms, or any white or brown mushrooms will work in its place. Alternatively, canned mushrooms can be used.
Cream sauce: Flour, butter, milk, and Parmesan cheese are mixed together to create a deliciously rich sauce. The step-by-step photos will walk you through the process of making a roux.
Vegetables: In addition to green beans and mushrooms, chopped shallots and water chestnuts add additional flavor and texture.
Fried onions: It’s not a green bean casserole without French’s Fried Onions! You can skip the store-bought version and make your own if you want.

How to Make a Homemade Green Bean Casserole

Step 1: Sauté The Vegetables

Melt the butter in a large Dutch oven, then sauté the shallots and mushrooms until the mixture begins to brown. Be patient as this process takes about 7-10 minutes.

Remove the vegetables from the pot, but do not wipe out the Dutch oven! The browned bits from the bottom of the pot will add another layer of savory flavor to the green bean casserole.

Make the roux.

If you’ve never cooked with a roux before, here’s a little more information about how to make a roux and the different types of roux. For this recipe, we will make a blonde roux, which is light in color and is used in most casserole recipes.

Melt the butter in the pot, then add the flour a little at a time. Be sure to continuously whisk the mixture. It should turn into a paste-like consistency.

Step 3: Finalize The Sauce

Slowly add in the milk a little at a time, whisking all the while. A smooth white sauce will begin to form. After all the milk is added, mix in the Parmesan cheese, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and allow the cheese to melt.

Next, add the green beans, mushrooms, shallots, and water chestnuts and stir well. Transfer the green bean mixture to a 9×13 casserole dish.

Step 4: Bake The Casserole

The total bake time is about 30 minutes. Bake the casserole uncovered, until bubbly, for about 15 minutes. Then, add the fried onions and cook for another 15 minutes. The fried onions should brown slightly and the casserole should be bubbling.

What To Serve With Green Bean Casserole

You can pair this Southern green bean casserole with any holiday mains or sides. It’s the perfect side dish for Thanksgiving or Christmas dinner! Here are a few serving options:

Recipe Variations

Canned soup: Two or three cans of cream of mushroom or cream of chicken soup can be used in place of the roux. The sautéed vegetables can still be used per the recipe. However, additional cans of soup may be needed.
Gluten-free: To prepare a gluten-free version of this green bean casserole, replace regular all-purpose flour with a reliable gluten-free 1:1 all-purpose flour blend.
Vegan-friendly: For a vegan version of this green bean casserole, use olive oil or a vegan-friendly butter substitute instead of regular butter. Opt for plant-based milk, and you can even use vegan Parmesan cheese instead!
Spicy: Add finely chopped jalapeños to the onion mix. Alternatively, you can sprinkle crushed red pepper flakes into the mushroom sauce to add some spice.
Bacon: Try dicing and frying some bacon or pancetta to infuse this dish with more savory flavors.
Different cheese: Try mixing in your favorite cheese varieties like smoked Gouda, gruyere, mozzarella, havarti, sharp cheddar, Jack, or Colby.

Tips For The Best Recipe

Fresh ingredients: Always choose the freshest ingredients, especially for vegetables like mushrooms and shallots. They impart the most flavor and texture to the dish.
Using fresh beans: If you’re using fresh green beans, cut them to uniform sizes so they cook evenly throughout the casserole. Trim off the ends and cut them into 1 ½ inch pieces. Prepare the green beans, pat dry, and use as directed in the recipe.
Mushroom sauté: Ensure the mushrooms are sautéed until their moisture has evaporated. This concentrates their flavor and prevents the casserole from becoming watery.
Roux consistency: When you’re making the roux, stir continuously to avoid any lumps and aim for a smooth, paste-like consistency before adding in the milk. This ensures a creamy sauce.
Watch the casserole: When baking, keep a close eye during the last 15 minutes to ensure the fried onions don’t burn. They should be golden and crispy. You can cover the baking dish with foil if needed.
Quality cheese: Use quality, freshly grated Parmesan cheese. It melts better and provides a richer flavor to the dish.

What To Do With Leftovers

If you have any leftovers, follow these simple storage and reheating tips to make the most of your green bean casserole:

Fridge: Store any leftover green bean casserole in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It should last for up to 4 days if properly refrigerated. Note: Green bean casserole should not be left unrefrigerated for more than 3-4 hours at a time.
Freezer: Freezing is not recommended for this particular green bean casserole because of its dairy-based sauce. The sauce may separate and become grainy or watery once thawed.
Reheating: You can easily reheat this casserole in an oven-safe dish at 350F for 15-20 minutes. Alternatively, microwave a single serving at 30-second intervals until warmed.

Can I make a green bean casserole ahead of time?

Yes, you can! To do so, prepare and assemble as directed, except for the fried onion topping. After the casserole is assembled, set aside to cool. Then, cover the casserole dish with aluminum foil and refrigerate overnight or up to 3 days before baking.

About 30 minutes before baking, allow the casserole dish to sit uncovered at room temperature to avoid shattering the dish. Then, bake as directed in the recipe card below.

Additional Recipes

If you enjoyed this Southern green bean casserole recipe, take a peek at some more side dishes like these:

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use a different type of mushroom other than cremini?

Yes, you can substitute cremini mushrooms with baby bellas, oyster mushrooms, or any other type of white or brown mushrooms. If you’re in a pinch, canned mushrooms can also be used.

What can I do to thicken the sauce if it’s too runny?

If your sauce is too thin, you can make a quick slurry with 1 tablespoon of cornstarch and 2 tablespoons of water. Mix it until smooth, then stir it into the casserole sauce to help it thicken.

What should I do if my casserole turns out soupy?

If the casserole is too watery, it might be due to excess moisture from the green beans or mushrooms. Next time, ensure they are well-drained or sautéed to release their moisture before adding them to the casserole.

Easy Green Bean Casserole

Course Holiday Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword casserole, Christmas, from scratch, holiday side, Side Dish, Thanksgiving

Prep Time 15

Cook Time 30

Total Time 45

Servings people

Calories 248kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Dutch Oven

Ingredients

48 ounces green beans drained
6 tablespoons butter salted and divided
8 ounces cremini mushrooms roughly chopped
1 shallot chopped
1 clove garlic minced
3 tablespoons all-purpose flour
3 cups whole milk
½ cup parmesan cheese shredded
2 teaspoon kosher salt
½ teaspoon black pepper
8 ounces water chestnuts drained and diced
1 cup French's Fried Onions

Instructions

Preheat oven to 350°F degrees and grease a 9×13 casserole dish.
To a large dutch oven, melt butter over medium-high heat.
Add mushrooms and shallot, and cook until mixture is brown and caramelized – about 7-10 minutes. Add garlic and stir quickly to avoid burning.
Transfer the mixture to a plate, and do not wipe or rinse your dutch oven.
Add butter to the same dutch oven over medium-high heat.
Then, add flour, whisking constantly. Then, gradually add in milk and whisk until smooth. Continue cooking until the flour, milk, and butter thicken and begin to bubble – about 5 minutes.
Remove from heat and add the Parmesan cheese, kosher salt, and pepper. Stir until melted and smooth.
Stir in green beans, mushroom mixture, and water chestnuts.
Transfer the mixture to the 9×13 casserole dish.
Bake, uncovered, until bubbly – about 15 minutes.
Remove from the oven and top with the fried onions and continue baking until the topping is golden brown – about 10-15 minutes.

Nutrition

The post Green Bean Casserole appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Homemade Sloppy Joe Recipe

Anna Kate — Mon, 08 Aug 2022 12:12:08 +0000

The best homemade sloppy joe recipe! Made from scratch, this recipe strikes the ideal balance between meat, sauce, and tons of flavor for perfectly sloppy, sloppy joe sandwiches. Ready in less than 30 minutes, this will be a weeknight dinner favorite the whole family will love.

Skip the canned sauce and get ready for the best sloppy joe you’ve ever had! This homemade version is one of many American favorites and absolutely delicious. Even though it’s made from scratch, it’s still quick and easy to put together on a busy weeknight.

This recipe is definitely a far cry from the school cafeterias of your childhood. There’s no mushy mystery meat or overly acidic sauce. These are super meaty, filling, and are way better than anything from a can!

If you want a recipe that doesn’t require a pile of dishes or a trip to the store, sloppy joe sandwiches are the perfect solution! Made all in one pot, the sloppy joe sauce is made with browned ground beef, onion, and a tangy tomato sauce and served on a buttery toasted bun.

Plus, you can whip these up in a hurry with what you already have in your pantry!

Easy Sloppy Joe Recipe

Sloppy Joes are classic comfort food for families! They are fast, convenient, and delicious. Plus, these ingredients are always on hand. Simple ingredients mean a happy mom and full bellies!

One of the greatest things about this recipe is the cost! Not to mention, it’s such a simple weeknight meal. Plus, you can easily omit different ingredients to customize the recipe to your preference and the ingredients you have on hand.

What are sloppy joes?

Sloppy Joes are a “loose meat” sandwich, made with ground beef and a slightly sweet, but savory tomato-based sauce. The sauce is then poured over a hamburger bun to make a delicious sloppy joe sandwich.

What is the original sloppy joe?

The original Sloppy Joe recipe was created around 1930 in a café in Sioux City, Iowa where a cook named Joe added tomato sauce to his “loose meat” sandwiches. The rest is history!

Sloppy Joes became even more popular sometime in the 1950s. Mainly because it was an easy family meal made with inexpensive ingredients that could be stretched with “filler” ingredients, like bell peppers, extra onion, additional ground meat, etc.

Today, the same remains true. A Sloppy Joe sandwich is a simple meal that’s filling, cheap, and enjoyed by the whole family!

Sloppy Joe Ingredients

(See the recipe card for complete details)

You only need a few simple pantry ingredients to get started.

Onion: Yellow or white onion is preferred. If you have kiddos that detest onions, you can simply omit this ingredient entirely.

Meat: I recommend 85-90% lean ground beef so you don’t have to drain the grease. You can also use ground turkey or ground chicken. Other recipes note that these can also be made vegetarian with lentils or meat alternatives.

Sloppy Joe Sauce: The sauce is made with tomato sauce, Worcestershire sauce, yellow mustard for a bit of tang, brown sugar for sweetness, and seasoned with salt, pepper, and garlic for the best savory sauce.

Optional Additions: Additional veggies will add more flavor and nutrition. Plus, the kids will never know as they will be camouflaged by the sloppy joe sauce! In addition to onion, try green pepper, celery, carrots, or other veggies to stretch the meat a little further.

How to Make Homemade Sloppy Joes

(See the recipe card below for full instructions and notes.)

Make the Sloppy Joe Sauce

Brown the meat over medium-high heat with the onion and garlic. Drain if needed and return to the pot. Then, season with salt and pepper. Sauté additional add-ins as needed.

In a large bowl, mix together the sauce ingredients: Worcestershire sauce, mustard, water, brown sugar, and tomato sauce. Give it a good whisk until all the ingredients are incorporated.

Pour the sauce over the ground beef, stir, and simmer for about 10-15 minutes. Broil the buns while you wait for the sauce to finish.

Make the Sloppy Joe Sandwiches

To assemble the sandwiches, add a scoop of the sauce mixture to a toasted hamburger bun and serve. The toasted, buttered buns are key to the best sloppy joe sandwich!

Toasting buns only takes a minute or two under the broiler, so stay close by.

You can also serve the sloppy joe mixture on slider buns, Texas toast, sandwich bread, or even over a hot dog!

What goes with Sloppy Joes?

Here are a few of the best side dishes for sloppy joes…

Air Fryer French fries
Baked Mac and Cheese
Baked Beans
Air Fryer broccoli
Air Fryer potatoes

More side dishes…

What is the difference between a sloppy joe and a Manwich?

Manwich is just the marketed version of the sloppy joe sauce. The canned version of this sauce is basically the same but marketed as “easier” than homemade.

Do you drain the fat from ground beef for sloppy joes?

If you are using lean ground beef, there shouldn’t be an excess of grease to be drained. If needed, transfer the ground beef to a colander to drain. Then, return the beef mixture to the pot and continue with the recipe.

What’s the difference between a sloppy joe and a sloppy Jane?

A Sloppy Jane is an alternative to a Sloppy Joe, using ground turkey instead of ground beef. This is an easy way to make this recipe slightly healthier.

Homemade Sloppy Joe Recipe

Course Main Course

Cuisine American

Keyword cheap dinner, easy dinner, fast dinner, one pot, sandwich, sloppy joe

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 15

Total Time 20

Servings people

Calories 399kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

1 small onion finely chopped
1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
1 teaspoon yellow mustard
¼ cup water
1 tablespoon brown sugar
15 ounce can tomato sauce
1 pound lean ground beef 85%-90% lean
1 tablespoon olive oil
½ teaspoon salt or to taste
¼ teaspoon black pepper or to taste
3 cloves garlic minced
4 hamburger buns toasted if desired

Instructions

Over medium-high heat, heat olive oil in a large skillet or dutch oven. Add the ground beef and brown for about 5 minutes until cooked through and longer pink, breaking it up with a spatula.
Add the onion and garlic. Cook another 5 minutes until the onion is tender and beef is browned. Drain the beef if needed and return it to the pot.
In a large bowl, combine the Worcestershire sauce, mustard, water, brown sugar, and tomato sauce. Stir to combine.
Pour in the sauce over the ground beef, stir, and bring to a light boil over medium heat. Reduce the heat to low and simmer uncovered for about 10-15 minutes.
While the sauce finishes, broil the buns while you wait. Toasting buns only takes a minute or two under the broiler, so stay close by.
To assemble the sandwiches, add a scoop of the sauce mixture to a toasted hamburger bun and serve.

Nutrition

The post Homemade Sloppy Joe Recipe appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Baked Ziti with Italian Sausage

Anna Kate — Wed, 03 Aug 2022 12:41:32 +0000

Baked Ziti with Italian Sausage is classic comfort food! With layers of pasta, homemade meat sauce, and melty cheese, this baked pasta casserole is the perfect solution for weeknight dinners. Tips for making it ahead of time and without meat are in the recipe card below!

Love the flavors of lasagna, but hate the hassle? This easy baked ziti recipe is for you! This casserole combines all of your favorite lasagna ingredients and flavors into a simple meal that’s ready in under an hour.

This is delicious with a piece of fresh garlic bread and a fresh garden salad. This recipe is great for families as you can easily customize it to your personal preference – use spicier sausage, make it vegetarian, add bell peppers, extra cheese…you can customize to your heart’s content!

Easy Baked Ziti Recipe

What is baked ziti? It’s a layered “casserole” of tubular noodles, cheese, and meat sauce.

This recipe is so easy and feeds a lot of hungry people! You can even make this ahead the night before and bake it when you get home from work. It’s easy, simple, delicious, and the kids love it, too.

In fact, this recipe is a great meal to prepare at the beginning of the week for plenty of leftovers later. You can even freeze the cooked dish for another time.

How is baked ziti different from lasagna?

Baked ziti is the perfect solution for lasagna cravings, especially during the week. Instead of long, flat lasagna noodles, this baked pasta dish uses short, tubular noodles.

Ziti noodles are like pockets, holding cheesy goodness and bursts of savory tomato sauce.

Baked Ziti Ingredients

(See the recipe card for complete details)

Meat Sauce: The meat sauce is made with mild, Italian sausage and jarred marinara sauce. Feel free to use spicy sausage or ground beef if desired. Alternatively, omit the meat for a vegetarian option.

You can even make your own tomato sauce with crushed tomatoes, tomato paste, and a few seasonings. Leftover spaghetti sauce works well for this recipe, too

Alternatively, omit the meat for a vegetarian option. Leftover spaghetti sauce works well for this recipe, too.

Pasta: Ziti is the pasta of choice for this recipe, but Penne or another tubular noodle would also work. You can learn more about the types of pasta here.

Cheese: Instead of ricotta cheese, this recipe uses cottage cheese mixed with parmesan and mozzarella. The cottage cheese makes this casserole even more delicious and creamy. Plus, it keeps it from drying out during cooking and reheating.

Seasoning: In addition to the sausage, oregano, garlic, and onion give this recipe tons of great flavor. If you choose to omit the meat, you may need to add additional seasonings to taste. Alternatively, feel free to add additional seasonings as desired, like Italian seasoning (in place of the oregano), red pepper flakes, extra garlic, and even fresh basil.

How to Make Baked Ziti

(See the recipe card below for full instructions and notes.)

Prepare the ziti.

In a large pot of salted water, cook the pasta according to the package directions – just until al dente. Drain and set aside.

Make the meat sauce.

Brown the sausage over medium-high heat in a large dutch oven, heavy-bottomed pot or large sauté pan. When the sausage is almost done cooking, add in the diced onion. Then, add in the garlic and stir well.

If needed, drain the grease from the cooked sausage. Return the meat to the pot and add in the marinara sauce. Feel free to use any flavor of marinara sauce you like most. Simmer for a few minutes, stirring occasionally.

Make the cheese filling (no ricotta).

Mix together the cottage cheese, egg, oregano, garlic, parmesan cheese, and half of the mozzarella cheese. Stir until well combined.

Assemble the pasta casserole.

Spoon a thin layer of the sauce on the bottom of a large casserole dish. This prevents the noodles from burning and sticking to the dish.

Layers are as follows: pasta, cheese, sauce, pasta, sauce, more cheese!

Start by adding half of the cooked pasta and all of the cottage cheese mixture.

When you add the cottage cheese mixture, do so in dollops in each of the corners so it’s easier to distribute on top of the noodles.

Then, spoon half of the sauce, the remaining pasta, and then the rest of the sauce on top. Finish the final layer with the remaining mozzarella cheese.

Bake this uncovered for about 25-30 minutes or until the dish begins to bubble and the cheese begins to turn golden.

Tips for the Best Baked Ziti Recipe

Using Different Noodles

Instead of ziti pasta, you can use any short tubular noodle, like penne, rigatoni, bow ties, etc.

Reheating Baked Ziti

To reheat baked ziti, add a portion to an oven-safe dish, cover with aluminum foil, and reheat at 325F for 15-20 minutes, or until warm. You may want to add extra sauce to keep it from drying out.

Alternatively, reheat in a microwave-safe dish at 1-minute increments, until warmed through. Add additional sauce and cheese as desired.

What can I use instead of ricotta in baked ziti?

This recipe calls for cottage cheese instead of ricotta. Cottage cheese has more moisture content than ricotta and will prevent the casserole from drying out.

During cooking, the curds of the cottage cheese melt and mix with the other cheeses to create a smooth, creamy filling.

Can baked ziti be made ahead of time?

Assemble the casserole, then cover with foil and refrigerate until you are ready to bake. *Make sure you bring the dish to room temp (sit out about 30 minutes) to avoid a shattered casserole dish.

Storing Uncooked Ziti

How long can uncooked baked ziti stay in the fridge? Uncooked ziti can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 3 days before cooking. Before baking, remove the casserole dish from the fridge and allow it to rest on the counter before placing it in the oven. This will prevent your dish from shattering.

Storing Leftover Baked Ziti

This can be stored for up to 3 days in an airtight container or in the casserole dish it was cooked in.

If freezing, portion into freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Allow the baked pasta to defrost in the refrigerator before reheating.

Vegetarian Baked Ziti

To make this ziti casserole vegetarian, omit the Italian sausage, and prepare the recipe according to the instructions.

What to Serve with Baked Ziti

Consider these options as the side dish:

Fresh garden salad
French bread
Caesar salad

More side dishes…

Baked Ziti with Italian Sausage

Course Dinner Recipes

Cuisine Italian

Keyword baked pasta, casserole, italian, pasta

Prep Time 20

Cook Time 30

Total Time 50

Servings people

Calories 356kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

olive oil
1 pound ground Italian sausage mild, hot, or sweet (I prefer mild)
1 cup yellow onion diced
24 ounces marinara sauce leftover spaghetti sauce, or tomato sauce
4 cloves garlic minced
16 ounces ziti pasta uncooked
12 ounces cottage cheese
1 tablespoon oregano
1 egg
2 cups mozzarella cheese shredded
¼ cup Parmesan cheese grated

Instructions

Preheat oven to 375°F. Grease a 9×13-inch casserole dish and set aside.

Prepare Sausage & Pasta Sauce

Brown the sausage over medium high heat in a large dutch oven or large sauté pan.
Add the diced onion to the pot of sausage. Sauté until onion softens, about 3-5 minutes.
Drain excess fat from the sausage as needed.
Reduce the heat to medium. Return the sausage to the dutch oven and add the garlic and stir quickly.
To the same pot, add the marinara sauce (leftover spaghetti sauce or tomato sauce may also be used). Stir and simmer for about 5 minutes.

Make Cheese "Filling"

While the sauce is warming, make the cheese filling by combining the cottage cheese, egg, oregano, parmesan cheese, and 1 cup of mozzarella cheese. Stir until well-combined.

Layer Casserole & Bake

Add about 1/4 cup of the meat sauce to the bottom of the greased casserole dish to prevent the noodles from burning or sticking.
Layer as follows: half of the ziti noodles, all of the cottage cheese mixture, half of the sauce, remaining ziti, and remaining sauce. Top with the remaining cup of mozzarella cheese.
Bake the casserole uncovered for 25-30 minutes or until cheese turns golden on top.

Notes

Alternatives to mild Italian Sausage: hot Italian sausage, sweet Italian sausage, ground beef, ground chicken, other meat alternatives. (note: this recipe has not been tested with meat alternatives.)

Alternatives to ziti noodles: bow ties, penne, rotini, rigatoni, or any short, tubular noodle.

Alternatives to Marinara:

Leftover meat sauce can be used in place of marinara.
Canned tomato sauce can be used as a substitute. Season as desired.

Nutrition

The post Baked Ziti with Italian Sausage appeared first on Southern Cravings.

How to Cook Bratwurst in the Oven {without a Grill}

Anna Kate — Wed, 15 Jun 2022 16:14:40 +0000

Learn how to cook bratwurst in the oven. Sear the brats on the stove and braise them with beer, onions, and sauerkraut in the oven. Beer-braised brats are a quick and easy way to tender, juicy sausages without using a grill. This recipe can be prepared with or without beer. See the recipe card and details below for ways to customize this recipe.

This easy beer brats recipe is going to take the top spot on your summer recipes! Besides grilling, beer braised bratwursts is the next best thing. It’s an easy dinner idea that’s a great option for for feeding a crowd.

Plus, it’s not always convenient to fire up the grill, so you always need these easy recipes so you can enjoy your favorite grilling recipes right from the oven.

Looking for another German-inspired recipe? Try this hearty goulash recipe.

What are bratwursts?

Bratwurst is a fresh link sausage that originated in Germany. It’s usually made with pork, veal, and sometimes beef. There are many different ways to prepare bratwursts, like grilling, pan searing, and baking on a sheet pan.

Traditionally, it’s seasoned with nutmeg, ginger, caraway and sage, but there have been many other iterations from the traditional flavor, like cheddar, beer, maple, asiago, and spicy to name a few.

These types of sausages are different from hot dogs, kielbasa, and Italian sausage.

Beer Braised Bratwurst and Sauerkraut

If you’re here, it’s likely that you are trying to figure out how to cook brats without a grill. Whether your grill is out of commission or the weather isn’t cooperating, this simple method will give you delicious savory bratwursts in the oven every time!

Surprisingly enough, braising can still give you that beautifully charred appearance and flavor from the grill without all the grilling hassle. Braising is the method of lightly pan-frying or searing meat or vegetables, then stewing them slowly in a covered pot in the oven. For this recipe, the braising liquid is beer.

Beer brats are also a one pot meal from start to finish! This makes it super easy to prepare this dish for more people and fast!

You don’t need to be an expert cook or a lot of side dishes to make this a meal. Serve this stuffed inside a german hoagie roll with the sauerkraut and onions from the pan. Add a little mustard and you are set!

What is the best beer to cook brats in?

The real ticket to tender, flavorful sausages is braising in beer.

When choosing a beer for braising, boiling, or soaking overnight, choose a bottle of your favorite beer that you enjoy and is easy to drink. I do recommend steering clear of porters, stouts, sweet beers, and heavily flavored beers. They could impact the flavors of the final dish.

The classic go-to beer for cooking brats is a lager or pilsner style beer. This includes Miller Light, Coors, Budlight, PBR and similar beers. You can also go a bit heavier with a Marzen, Oktoberfest, or Amber.

Basically, the beer should be something you enjoy that’s affordable.

Why should you cook beer in brats? Beer adds a lot of extra flavor to the bratwursts and keeps them plump and juicy throughout the cooking time. You can also boil the brats or soak them overnight in addition to braising them with the beer.

Don’t worry, though. All of the alcohol burns off during cooking. There will likely be a heavy aroma present, but there will be zero alcohol content after cooking.

Do you poke holes in beer brats? I personally do not do this. There are some that say this is the only way the beer can permeate and tenderize the meat. Others say the holes let all the juices leak from the sausage. I tend to agree with the latter.

What kind of buns are best for brats?

Bratwursts are much larger than regular hot dogs, so the bun selection is critical. The best brat buns are hearty, stealthy rolls that can stand-up against all of those delicious juices, toppings, and condiments.

Consider these brat-approved buns:

Sausage Buns
Brat and Sausage Rolls
Hoagie Rolls
Hearty Top-sliced Buns
German Roll

You can find these baked fresh from the bakery at your local grocery store. Also, try these in brioche, pretzel, sourdough, and other flavors.

How to Cook Beer Brats without a Grill

There are just a few simple steps to making delicious beer bratwursts!

Here are a few kitchen tools I recommend to make this recipe easier:

Disposable Aluminum Pan: Cook more sausages faster! Sear the sausages and onions in a skillet, then transfer to a large disposable pan for easy clean-up.
Cast Iron Skillet: If you don’t have a cast-iron skillet, use an oven-proof skillet or shallow pot. A 9 x 13 inch casserole dish will also work as an alternative. See the recipe below for instructions.
Digital Meat Thermometer: Use this to ensure the sausages reach the safe internal temperature.

Step 1: Pan sear the bratwurst sausages.

Before you begin, start by preheating the oven to 400°F.

Add oil to a large cast iron skillet or oven-proof skillet, and heat the oil over medium-high heat. Using tongs, carefully add the bratwursts to the pan and sear for a couple of minutes on each side until nicely browned on all sides.

Then, remove the sausages to a plate and set aside.

Step 2: Caramelize the onions.

To the same skillet, add the onions and season with salt and pepper. Add extra oil if needed.

Continue cooking, stirring the onions frequently until they are softened and golden brown. This should take about 5 minutes in total.

If you’re pan is getting too hot and the onions are browning too quickly, reduce the heat slightly and stir more frequently.

Step 3: Braise the brats in beer.

Now, add the brats back to the skillet and arrange on top on the onions. Pour the beer over the sausages and onions. Remember, you don’t need anything fancy for the beer. A simple light lager is sufficient.

Next, add the sauerkraut and spread evenly over the brats and onions. Turn the stove off.

Step 4: Bake the sausages.

Cover the oven-proof skillet with the lid or aluminum foil. Transfer the pan to the preheated oven and cook at 400F for 40 minutes, or until the internal temperature reads 160°F using a meat thermometer.

If you do not have an oven proof skillet, transfer the contents of the pan to a greased 9 x 13 inch baking dish.

After 20 minutes, check to see if the dish is too dry. If so, add additional beer as needed.

Remove the pan from the oven. Rotate the bratwursts in the sauerkraut and onion mixture to incorporate all of the flavors before serving. All the sausages to rest for about 5 minutes before serving. They will be hot!

While the beer brats rest, toast the buns under the broiler for about a minute or two until they are browned to your liking. Be careful not to leave the broiler unattended!

Add the brats, onions, and sauerkraut to a toasted bun. Serve with whole grain mustard, relish, or your favorite toppings.

Reheating and Storing Leftover Beer Brats

Storing: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
Reheating: Reheat bratwursts with toppings in the microwave for a minute at a time until warmed through. Rotate every minute or so for even warming.
Freezing: Freeze cooked and uncooked bratwurst sausages without the buns and toppings for up to 3 months. Store wrapped in plastic wrap and inside a freezer bag for best results.

How long to cook brats in the oven at 400?

Brats should cook for up to 40 minutes in a 400°F oven.

What is traditionally served with bratwurst?

Bratwurst is served with sauerkraut, onions, and sometimes bell peppers. Make this a meal or serve with a variety of side dishes like pasta salad, potato pancakes, cucumber salad, german potato salad, etc.

What condiments go with brats?

Try these ideas for bratwurst toppings: onions, bell peppers, mustard, mayonnaise, pickles, relish, pickled red onions, caramelized onions and mushrooms, etc.

Braising bratwursts in beer is a great method to preparing an easy meal for a busy weeknight or a summertime gathering.

Beer Brats in the Oven – No Grill!

Course Dinner Recipes

Cuisine German

Keyword beer, braising, brats, bratwurst, sausages

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 50

Additional Time 5

Total Time 5

Servings

Calories 443kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

2 tablespoons olive oil
7 bratwursts unflavored and uncooked
2 medium yellow onions thinly sliced
1 12 ounce bottle lager beer (see note)
salt and pepper to taste

Serving Options:

Hoagie rolls or buns
Coarse grain mustard
Warm sauerkraut

Instructions

Start by preheating the oven to 400°F.
Add oil to a large cast iron skillet or oven-proof skillet, and heat the oil over medium-high heat. Using tongs, carefully add the bratwursts to the pan and sear 2-3 minutes on each side until nicely browned.
Transfer the sausages to a plate and set aside.
To the same skillet, add the onions and season with salt and pepper. Add extra oil if needed.
Continue cooking, stirring the onions frequently until they are softened and golden brown, about 5 minutes. Reduce the heat if needed.
Return the bratwursts back to the pan with the onions. Pour in the beer. Add sauerkraut in a single layer over the top of the sausages and onions. Turn the stove off.
Cover the skillet with the lid or aluminum foil. Transfer the pan to the oven and cook at 400°F for 40 minutes, or until the internal temperature reads 160°F using a meat thermometer.
Check the mixture after 20 minutes of cooking. Add about ¼ cup of beer if additional liquid is needed.
Remove the pan from the oven. Rotate the bratwursts in the sauerkraut and onion mixture to incorporate all of the flavors before serving. Allow sausages to rest for about 5 minutes before serving. They will be hot!
While the beer brats rest, toast the buns under the broiler until they are browned to your liking. Be careful not to leave the broiler unattended!
Add the brats, onions, and sauerkraut to a toasted bun. Serve with whole grain mustard, relish, or your favorite toppings.

Notes

If you do not have an oven proof skillet, transfer the contents of the pan to a greased 9 x 13 inch casserole dish before baking.

Avoid any brats already flavored with beer, as the finished dish will taste too bitter. Also be sure to purchase fresh (not cooked) sausages.

Lager is a family of beers that includes bright lagers, amber lagers, dark lagers, Oktoberfests, and pilsners. Budweiser, Bud Light, Coors Light, and Miller Lite are all good options. You will only need 12 ounces. No need to use anything fancy!

Reheating / Storing / Leftovers Info:

Storing: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
Reheating: Reheat bratwursts with toppings in the microwave for a minute at a time until warmed through. Rotate every minute or so for even warming.
Freezing: Freeze cooked and uncooked bratwurst sausages without the buns and toppings for up to 3 months. Store wrapped in plastic wrap and inside a freezer bag for best results.

Nutrition

The post How to Cook Bratwurst in the Oven {without a Grill} appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Best Frozen French Fries in the Air Fryer

Anna Kate — Fri, 10 Jun 2022 10:00:00 +0000

How to cook frozen French fries in the air fryer – the healthier way to enjoy fries without deep-frying! Made in 20 minutes, use store-bought frozen French fries for perfectly crispy fries every single time! Tips on seasoning, cook time, and reheating leftover fries are in the recipe card below.

No more messy deep frying or soggy french fries! Air frying has transformed the way we cook. It’s one of the quickest, most efficient ways to prepare so many different dishes. We use our Ninja Foodi multi-cooker on a very regular basis…almost daily! It’s great for reheating leftovers and making meals fast.

A few of our favorite air fryer recipes include frozen burgers, “grilled” chicken breast, and pizza rolls. We even use it to reheat pizza for leftover homemade pizza!

Air Fryer Frozen French Fries

Before I discovered air frying french fries, we would make them in the oven. This resulted in uneven cooking, some were soggy, and some were burned. It didn’t seem to matter whether I used shoestring fries, waffle fries, curly fries, or any other shape. They never turned out the way they do in a fast-food restaurant.

And forget deep frying french fries. There was too much mess and so much grease!

Now, we only use the air fryer to make french fries. The air fryer makes them so crispy on the outside and tender (not dry!) on the inside. It’s my favorite way to make them for burgers!

Why this is the best way to make french fries:

It’s simple. There’s nothing fancy about this method. Simply dump a bag of frozen fries into the air fryer, season, cook, and enjoy.
It’s versatile. You can use any shape of french fry you like: curly, waffle, shoestring, steak fries, seasoned, or unseasoned.
It’s fast. From frozen to fried, these are done in about 20 minutes. Plus, there’s minimal clean-up.
It’s (more) health-conscious. Fries aren’t exactly “healthy” but frying them with less oil makes them a little better for you than deep frying.

Making french fries in the air fryer vs. oven vs. deep fryer

Whether you are cooking frozen or homemade french fries, there are three main ways to prepare them:

Air Fried French Fries: This method is the easiest way to get crispy fries. There’s also minimal mess to clean up, especially when compared to deep frying. Using the air fryer ensures you have perfectly crispy french fries every single time.

Baked French Fries: While it’s simple, baking doesn’t always leave you with the best results. I’ve never been able to get that perfectly crispy texture using the oven. Plus, some of the fries can easily dry out on the inside while others are undercooked.

Deep-Fried French Fries: Using a deep fryer is a great way to get crispy, hot, salty fries. The oil also makes a big mess and splatters everywhere. Plus, the oil is an extra cost that’s poured out at the end of cooking. Not to mention, it’s the least health-conscious option.

Are french fries healthier in an air fryer?

French fries get a bad rap for being an unhealthy junk food because they are usually deep-fried and heavily salted.

Air frying allows you to reduce the amount of oil drastically and control the amount of seasoning added. All of this without compromising the fried and salty flavors! It may not be nutritiously more healthy, but it is a better choice than deep frying.

What You Need to Make Crispy Air Fryer Fries

Air Fryer: You can use a traditional air fryer unit or a multi-cooker with an air fryer function.
Frozen French Fries: All different types of fries will work for this recipe. You can use different brands, too: Ore Ida, generic brands, etc. (more info below)
Seasoning: This recipe uses a pinch of salt, but you can season with any seasoning you like.
Cooking Spray: Light cooking spray is all you need to crisp up these french fries.
Condiments: Don’t forget to grab your favorite dipping sauce, fry sauce, yum yum sauce, ketchup, mustard, etc.

How to Cook French Fries in an Air Fryer

This is such an easy way to get the best fries you’ve ever had!

Add the frozen fries to the basket of your air fryer. Season with salt and pepper or the seasoning of your choice. See the suggestions below.

Then, lightly spray the fries with olive oil spray. This helps them crisp up even more.

Set the air fryer to cook for 10 minutes at 400°F. After 10 minutes, shake the basket and continue cooking for another 5-10 minutes or until the fries reach the desired crispiness.

Shaking the air fryer basket or tray rotates the fries and helps cook them evenly. This also makes sure the texture is the same on every fry.

Note: If the fries have air fryer instructions, refer to those for the cooking time and temperature.

To serve, transfer the cooked fries to a plate, and add any final seasonings before diving in!

Why are my fries not crispy in the air fryer?

If the fries aren’t crisping up, it’s likely that the air fryer is overcrowded or the air is not hot enough. You may also need to increase the cooking time.

The age of your air fryer, basket shape, and amount of fries will impact the cooking time, too. Use the info in the recipe card as a guideline.

Should frozen French fries be thawed before frying?

You do not need to defrost the french fries before air frying. The great thing about using the air fryer is that you rarely need to defrost what you are cooking. Simply dump the fries straight from the freezer and cook!

Ideas for Seasoning Frozen French Fries

Can I season frozen fries? Yes, you can! If you’re wondering how to make frozen fries taste better, the secret is in the seasoning!

You can amp up frozen fries easily with seasonings and herbs you likely already have in your kitchen. Simply add the seasoning to the fries before cooking. When using fries that are already flavored, use caution when adding additional seasonings.

Here are some seasoning ideas for french fries:

Make them gourmet. Sprinkle with onion powder, garlic salt, and fresh rosemary.
Lawry’s Seasoning Salt
Cajun or Creole Seasoning
Drizzle with truffle oil after cooking.
Classic salt and pepper
Italian seasoning
Garlic and parmesan cheese

Air Frying Different Types of Fries

There are so many different kinds of french fries out there. You can do all of them in an air fryer, but you made need to adjust the cooking time to more or less, depending on your desired crispiness.

Here are some different types of French fries:

Curly fries
Waffle fries
Tater tots
Crinkle cut fries
Seasoned and unseasoned fries
Potato wedges
Steak fries
Shoestring fries

Tips for the Best French Fries

Don’t overcrowd the basket. Allowing enough room for the hot air to circulate is important for the best and most crispy french fries. Most air fryers have an indicator to show the maximum fill line. One bag of french fries will fit in the basket of a 4-quart air fryer.

Shake the basket. For even cooking and the best results, make sure you shake the air fryer basket to rotate the french fries as they cook.

Seasoning. Don’t be afraid to get creative with different seasonings. Season before cooking with homemade seasoning or store-bought rubs. Alternatively, add grated parmesan or drizzle truffle oil over the fries just before serving for a gourmet twist.

Different types of fries. Make the french fries homemade or from the freezer section. This method will work on any shape of French fry. Adjust the cook time as needed.

How to serve French Fries

Serve these with a big juicy burger, pork chops, chicken nuggets, hot sandwich sliders, or any other main dish.

Don’t forget the dipping sauces! Try BBQ sauce, ketchup, mustard, ranch dressing, and more.

Reheating and Storing Leftover French Fries

Use up the leftover french fries for poutine or a different take on nachos.

Store the leftovers inside an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. To reheat the french fries, program the air fryer to 350°F for 5-7 minutes or until crispy and warm.

Recipe FAQ and Expert Tips

Can you cook store-bought frozen French fries in an air fryer?

Yes, frozen french fries can be cooked in an air fryer. These can be store-bought or homemade.

Should I preheat my air fryer for frozen French fries?

It’s not necessary to preheat an air fryer. There are many sources that say this makes the food even better, but I haven’t noticed a difference.

How do you crisp french fries in an air fryer?

For additional crispiness, you can use the broil function on the air fryer or extend the cooking time. Use this with caution as they can quickly burn or dry out.

How much oil do you put in an air fryer for french fries?

No oil is needed to cook frozen french fries in the air fryer.

These are the best frozen fries! It’s an easy side dish that we love to serve with our air fryer hamburgers. Make these just like your favorite fast-food fries and use your favorite seasonings and dip them in your favorite sauce.

Best, Crispiest Air Fryer French Fries

How to cook frozen french fries in the air fryer – the healthier way to enjoy fries without deep-frying! This is the best method for making crispy, delicious french fries. Use your favorite brand of store-bought frozen french fries. Made in about 20 minutes, these fries come out perfectly crispy every single time! Tips on seasoning, cook time, and reheating leftover fries are in the recipe card below.

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, french fries

Cook Time 20

Total Time 20

Servings servings

Calories 139kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Pressure Cooker

Ingredients

16- ounce bag of frozen French fries
salt I like to use seasoning salt
cooking spray

Instructions

Place the frozen fries in the basket of your air fryer. Sprinkle with salt and spray lightly with olive oil spray.
Cook for 400 degrees for 10 minutes. Shake the fries and cook for an additional 5-10 minutes until crispy.

Notes

This method works on any type of french fry.
Season the fries before cooking. When using fries that are already flavored, use caution when adding additional seasonings.
If the fries have air fryer instructions, refer to those for the cooking time and temperature.

Reheating / Storing / Leftovers Info:

Store leftovers inside an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

To reheat the french fries, program the air fryer to 350°F for 5-7 minutes or until crispy and warm.

Nutrition

The post Best Frozen French Fries in the Air Fryer appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Frozen Burgers in the Air Fryer

Anna Kate — Thu, 09 Jun 2022 10:00:00 +0000

Learn how to cook a frozen hamburger in the air fryer. Frozen beef patties, simple seasoning, your favorite condiments, and an air fryer is all you need to enjoy burgers all year round. In just 10 minutes, you can have a delicious burger that tastes like it came right off the grill! No defrosting or prep work necessary.

This method is perfect for beef burgers. This also works on veggie burgers, Beyond Meat, turkey burgers, salmon burgers, and other frozen meat patties.

Air Fryer Hamburger Recipe

Cook juicy, flavorful burgers from frozen beef patties perfectly every time! This is the easiest way to enjoy a hamburger whenever the craving strikes.

Premade frozen burgers are the ultimate convenience item! These patties are already formed, then frozen for purchase at your local grocery store. At about an inch thick, these only take 10 minutes to prepare.

Out of the many recipes we make in the air fryer, hamburgers are definitely our top choice. There’s something about the simplicity of whipping up a burger without all the fuss of preheating the grill, defrosting the meat, cleaning the grill, and… monitoring the weather.

I use a Ninja Foodi Air Fryer for all of my air fryer recipes. On average, we use it at least three times per week…sometimes more! We even use it to reheat pizza for leftover homemade pizza! A few of our other easy air fryer recipes include pizza rolls, French fries, “grilled” chicken breast, and chicken nuggets.

Here’s why I love this recipe.

It’s easy. There is zero prep work when you use premade burger patties. All you have to do is pull them out of the freezer, add seasoning, and air fry.
It’s fast. Burgers are ready in about 10 minutes, which is about a fraction of the time compared to grilling. No fuss over preheating the grill, defrosting meat, cleaning the grill, etc.
Weather friendly. No more stress over maintaining the grill’s temperature in really cold or hot weather. Plus, you can make burgers in rain, snow, sleet, or shine!
No grill needed. Air fryers can be used for so many different things. (more ideas below!)
No thawing. You can cook these burgers straight from the freezer. No defrosting necessary.

Air Frying vs. Grilling vs. Pan Searing Burgers

Air Frying: When air fried, these burgers cook very quickly while staying juicy and tender. There is also minimal mess to clean up, aside from washing the utensils and air fryer basket. Since these are (typically) non-stick, cleaning up is a breeze. Some can even go in the dishwasher.

Grilling Burgers: It’s a classic way to prepare burgers, but it’s also labor-intensive. There’s so much more to the cooking process with grilling: preheating the grill, cleaning the grill, stabilizing the temperature, considering the weather, etc.

Not to mention, you also have to replace the propane on occasion, have room for storing the grill, supplies, etcetera. Plus, there’s a bit of a learning curve with operating a grill.

Pan Searing Burgers: Before the air fryer, this was the default if the grill wasn’t an option. But, this gets messy and smelly. It also produces a lot of grease. The grease splatters when the cold burgers hit the pan and the smell can permeate through the house.

Best Brand of Frozen Hamburger Patties

There are many different options for premade frozen burger patties. Typically, we stick to generic brands, but we’ve also had great success using other brands, too.

Here are some of the most popular brands of frozen patties:

Ball Park
Bubba Burgers
Omaha Steaks
Applegate
Generic store brands like Trader Joe’s, Costco, Walmart, Kroger, Meijer, etc.

Any lean-to-fat ratio is up to your own preference. Also, angus, chuck, reduced fat, flavored options, and more will all make for a great burger!

Frozen Burger Patties vs. Fresh

The key to keeping this process easy and simple is the pre-pattied frozen burgers. You can find these in the freezer section of the grocery store. You can also use this method to prepare frozen burgers you’ve made at home, too.

Can you cook a raw burger in an air fryer?

While these instructions are specific to frozen hamburger meat, you can also use these same steps for fresh, raw, or thawed burger patties. The cook time and temperature largely depends on the thickness of the burgers. Keep that in mind when you are preparing to cook.

How to make thawed burgers in the air fryer:

Add the patties to the air fryer basket in a single layer.
Cook at 375°F for 6-8 minutes. Then, flip and cook for another 6-8 minutes.
The burger is done when the internal temperature reaches 160°F when read with a meat thermometer.

How to Season Frozen Hamburger Patties

You might be curious as to how the seasoning sticks to a frozen burger patty. Typically, we marinate our frozen burgers in Dale’s Seasoning before we put them in the air fryer. We let them marinate for about 10-15 minutes.

If you aren’t using a liquid seasoning or marinade, dry rubs and seasonings are great options, too. Place the frozen patties in the air fryer and sprinkle on the dry seasoning on one side. After flipping the patties, add the seasoning to the other side.

Use your own store bought burger seasoning, a homemade dry rub, or a combination of garlic powder, onion powder, and salt and pepper.

How to Cook a Frozen Hamburger in the Air Fryer

You just need a few simple ingredients to make the perfect burger!

What you need to make a juicy air fryer hamburger:

Air Fryer: You can use a traditional air fryer unit or a multi-cooker with an air fryer function.
Frozen Beef Patties: You can use premade options or cook a frozen homemade version. This method works with turkey burgers, veggie burgers, elk burgers, or bison burgers, too.
Seasoning: Use a liquid or dry ingredient marinade of your choice. Montreal steak seasoning or other store bought rubs are great for additional convenience.
Condiments and Toppings: Dress your burger with lettuce, cheese slices, condiments, and other toppings.

Step 1: Season the Frozen Burger Patties.

Remember, there’s no need to thaw the premade patty. Just remove it from the freezer and place the burgers in a single layer in a casserole dish or rimmed baking sheet.

Add the dry seasoning or pour in the marinade. If you are using dry seasoning, place the burgers into the air fryer basket and add the seasoning on the top side. Then, add seasoning to the opposite side after flipping the patties.

Step 2: Air Fry the Burgers.

Next, place the patties into the basket of your air fryer and cook for 8-10 minutes at 350°F. Flip halfway through the cooking time to ensure the patties are evenly cooked and browned on all sides.

The burgers are done when they reach an internal temperature of 165°F when read with a meat thermometer.

Do you need to flip burgers in the air fryer?

While it’s not absolutely necessary, flipping the burgers during the cooking process will ensure that the meat is evenly cooked throughout. Plus, a little “grill char” develops on the side that touches the air fryer basket. This adds additional flavor and appetizing coloring to the patty.

Step 3: Serve the burgers.

Once your hamburgers are cooked, remove them from the air fryer, add them to a bun, dress with your favorite toppings and condiments and serve!

How to Make a Cheeseburger

To turn your hamburger into a cheeseburger, place a cheese slice on top of the patty and allow the burger to rest for a minute or two inside the air fryer with the unit off. The cheese will not blow around with this method!

Serving Suggestions for Assembling Burgers

In my opinion, there’s no “correct” way to dress a burger. It’s all about what you like and the flavors you enjoy.

If you are serving more than a few people, I recommend setting up a “burger bar” with a large platter of condiments and toppings. This way, people can assemble their burgers in their own way.

Here are a few tips for serving burgers:

Include standard burger toppings: Ketchup, mustard, mayonnaise, pickle chips, lettuce, onion, and tomato are all classic additions to burgers.
Add sauces: Use bbq sauce, sriracha mayo, chipotle mayo, aioli spreads, and other flavorful spreads.
Incorporate themes: This could be from different regions, countries, or inspired by a party theme. Add regional flavors, sauces, and ingredients to play on the theme of the meal. Like Cajun, Mexican, Asian, and BBQ themes.
Don’t forget the buns: Use different flavored hamburger buns for variety. Toast them under the oven broiler or in the air fryer after the burgers have been removed.
Other toppings: Don’t be afraid to get creative with unusual toppings. Try sliced avocado, guacamole, caramelized onions and mushrooms, pickled onions and more.

Tips for the Best Frozen Burgers

Don’t crowd the basket. For even cooking and best results, make sure the patties are in a single layer inside the air fryer basket.
Season well. Use your favorite homemade seasoning or store bought seasoning.
Cooking times will vary. Since every air fryer is different, it’s hard to get the timing right for every make and model of air fryer. My advice is to use my time as a guideline, adjusting the cooking time according to your air fryer unit. The age of your air fryer, basket shape, and number of patties will all impact the cooking time.
Make cleaning up easy. Line the basket with aluminum foil or parchment paper for easier clean up.

Air Fryer Hamburger FAQ

How long does it take to cook a hamburger in the air fryer?

The process of cooking a burger in the air fryer takes about 10 minutes from start to finish.

Can you put frozen burgers in an air fryer?

Yes, frozen hamburgers do really well in the air fryer. In about 10 minutes, the burgers will go from completely frozen to juicy and tender.

Can you put aluminum foil and parchment paper in an air fryer?

If you want to make the clean-up process easier, line the air fryer basket with aluminum foil or parchment paper.

Do you preheat an air fryer?

It’s not necessary to preheat an air fryer. There are many sources that say this makes the food even better, but I haven’t noticed a difference.

Should I grill or air fry burgers?

Air frying hamburgers is a much more convenient option than grilling. It’s cleaner, hassle-free, and doesn’t have a learning curve like grilling.

Are hamburgers good cooked in an air fryer?

Hamburgers are delicious prepared in the air fryer. It’s an easy way to have a juicy burger quickly.

What to serve with hamburgers:

See more side dishes here.

Air fryer hamburgers are the easiest way to enjoy burgers for a great weeknight dinner!

Air Fryer Frozen Burgers

Learn how to cook a frozen hamburger in the air fryer. Frozen beef patties, simple seasoning, your favorite condiments, and an air fryer is all you need to enjoy the perfect burger. In just 10 minutes, you can have a delicious burger that tastes like it came right off the grill! No defrosting or prep work necessary.

This method is perfect for beef burgers. This also works on veggie burgers, Beyond Meat, turkey burgers, salmon burgers, and other frozen meat patties.

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, beef, burger, hamburger

Cook Time 10

Total Time 10

Servings burgers

Calories 540kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

Frozen beef burger patties*

Instructions

Season or marinate the burger patties.*
Place the patties into the air fryer basket.
Cook the burger for 8-10 minutes at 350°F, flipping the patties at the 5-minute mark.
Burger is done when it reaches an internal temp of 165°F.
Optional: Add a slice of cheese to the patty and close the lid of the air fryer. Allow it to rest for 1-2 minutes or until the cheese is melted. This is done with the air fryer off and lid closed.
Remove the hamburger from the air fryer basket. Serve on a bun with desired toppings.

Notes

This method is perfect for beef burgers. This also works on veggie burgers, Beyond Meat, turkey burgers, salmon burgers, and other frozen meat patties.

If you are using dry seasoning, place the burgers into the air fryer basket and add the seasoning on the top side. Then, add seasoning to the opposite side after flipping the patties.

Reheating / Storing / Leftovers Info:

Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days.
Reheat burgers in the microwave for one minute at a time, or in the air fryer for 3 minutes at 375°F.

Variations

Don’t be afraid to get creative. Add flavors from different regions, countries, or themes. Include their local flavors, sauces, and ingredients. Examples: Cajun, Mexican, Asian, BBQ, etc.

How to make raw, defrosted hamburgers in the air fryer:

Add the patties to the air fryer basket in a single layer.
Cook at 375°F for 6-8 minutes. Then, flip and cook for another 6-8 minutes.
The burger is done when the internal temperature reaches 160°F when read with a meat thermometer.

A note on air fryer units: Every air fryer is different which means cook times and temperatures vary across different units. The age of your air fryer, basket shape, and capacity will all impact the cooking time. Use the time listed in the recipe card as a guideline, adjusting the cooking time according to your air fryer unit.

Nutrition

The post Frozen Burgers in the Air Fryer appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Frozen Pizza Rolls

Anna Kate — Wed, 08 Jun 2022 10:00:00 +0000

Looking for a quick snack or appetizer? Cook Totino’s pizza rolls in the air fryer! This is the easiest way to get perfect pizza rolls every time! In less than 10 minutes, you’ll have crispy air fryer pizza rolls for an after school snack, game day appetizers, or a quick weeknight meal for picky eaters.

Is there anything easier than an air fryer snack? Frozen food is the ultimate convenience item. While it’s not always the healthiest choice, it does make preparing snacks so easy! There’s no prep work or planning ahead. You don’t even need to thaw the pizza rolls to use this recipe.

I love the “crunch” of a hot pizza roll, which is why I love making these in the air fryer. I use a Ninja Foodi Air Fryer for all of my air fryer recipes. On average, we use it at least three times per week…sometimes more! We even use it to reheat pizza for leftover homemade pizza!

Air fryers aren’t just for snacks. A few of our other easy air fryer recipes include hamburgers, french fries, “grilled” chicken breast, and chicken nuggets.

Frozen Totino’s Pizza Rolls in the Air Fryer

Besides an air fryer, the only other thing you actually need is the frozen pizza rolls. For this recipe, I used Totino’s pepperoni pizza rolls, but you can use any brand you choose.

Want to make your own homemade pizza rolls? You can make them using wonton wrappers, pizza dough, or crescent rolls for the shell. Just add pizza sauce, mozzarella cheese, and pizza toppings, then wrap and cook!

I love making pizza rolls like this because it requires zero prep work. Plus, you can even add additional seasonings for more flavor – all in the air fryer!

See the sections below for more flavor ideas.

Pizza rolls in the air fryer oven vs. microwave or oven

Using an air fryer is the best way to get the crispy shell on the outside and warm pizza filling on the inside. With the air fryer, you can have them from the freezer to your plate in less than 10 minutes!

Here’s why I prefer the air fryer instead of the microwave or oven:

Microwave: Using the microwave is equally as fast, but it doesn’t leave you with the same results. The outside of the pizza roll won’t be crispy, but it will be doughy and soft. Nobody likes a soggy pizza roll!
Oven: An oven will deliver similar results, but the air fryer takes less time. First, you have to wait for the oven to preheat. Then, you have to wait for at least 10 more minutes until they are done.

How to Air Fry Pizza Rolls

Looking for a quick and easy appetizer? These pizza rolls are the perfect way to feed a party crowd! Air frying them keeps the cooking process quick. Plus, you aren’t using a bunch of oil like you would for deep frying.

All you have to do is drop them in the air fryer basket for about 10 minutes and you’ll have hot, delicious, mini pizza bites that will be devoured in no time!

What you need to cook pizza rolls in the air fryer:

Air Fryer: You can use a traditional air fryer unit or a multi-cooker with an air fryer function.
Pizza Rolls: I used Totino’s pepperoni pizza rolls, but different brands will also work. These need to stay frozen before cooking.
Cooking Spray: I like to lightly spray the pizza rolls so you get them extra crispy! Using cooking spray does help with cleaning up the melty cheese and sauce that oozes out. You can also line the air fryer basket with parchment paper or aluminum foil to make clean up easier.
Favorite Dipping Sauce: We love to dip in tomato sauce like marinara, blue cheese dressing, or ranch dressing.

The great thing about using an air fryer is that you do not need to preheat it as you would an oven.

All you need to do is add the pizza rolls to the basket of the air fryer. Try to keep them in a single layer. It’s ok if they touch a little, but too much overlapping can increase cooking time without as much crisp.

Turn your air fryer to 380°F and hit go! Air fry the pizza rolls for about 8-10 minutes, or until they are golden brown and reach the desired crispness on the outside.

Don’t forget to shake the basket halfway through, or flip the pizza rolls with tongs.

Allow them to stand for 2 minutes before serving hot with dipping sauce, like warmed marinara sauce.

Remember, the pizza roll filling will be extremely hot! So, take that first bite with caution to avoid burning your mouth.

How long do you cook frozen pizza rolls in an air fryer?

Since every air fryer is different, it’s hard to get the timing right for every make and model of air fryer. My advice is to use my time as a guideline.

The age of your air fryer, basket shape, and number of pizza rolls will all impact the cooking time. You may need to add or reduce the cooking time according to your air fryer unit. I recommend checking after 3-4 minutes of cook time and as you begin to smell the pizza rolls cooking.

How do you add flavor to pizza rolls?

Can I season pizza rolls? Yes, you can! In fact, you don’t even have to take them out of the air fryer before doing so.

After the pizza rolls are done cooking, open the air fryer lid and brush with a little oil or melted butter so the seasoning can stick. Then, add the seasoning as desired.

Here are some seasoning ideas for pizza rolls:

Italian seasoning
Garlic butter and fresh herbs
Garlic salt
Dried ranch seasoning
Grated parmesan cheese
Drizzle with pesto
Hot sauce
Any other seasoning you enjoy with a slice of pizza.

Reheating and Storing Cooked Pizza Rolls

Store leftover pizza rolls in an airtight container in the fridge. For the best results, I recommend using within 3 days.

Reheat the pizza rolls using the microwave or air fryer.

Reheating in the air fryer: Air fry for 2-5 minutes at 375°F degrees, or until warmed through.
Reheating in the microwave: Microwave for 30-60 seconds until warmed through. Keep in mind that the outside will no longer be crispy after microwaving.

What goes with pizza rolls?

If you are preparing pizza rolls for dinner, prepare a quick side dish like a vegetable or side salad.

If you’re serving these to the kids at a party, put out chips, pretzels, or other snacks to go with the pizza rolls.

Don’t forget to serve these with dipping sauce!

Air Fryer Pizza Rolls FAQs & Tips

How do you doctor up pizza rolls?

Doctor up pizza rolls by brushing with olive oil or melted butter. Then, add different seasonings like Italian seasoning, grated parmesan cheese, dried ranch seasoning, garlic salt, pesto, or anything else you enjoy adding to a slice of pizza.

How do I make my pizza rolls crispy?

To make pizza rolls extra crispy, lightly spray the pizza rolls with olive oil spray before cooking. After rotating them halfway through cooking time, lightly spray again.

Can you cook frozen pizza rolls in the air fryer?

Yes, this recipe uses frozen pizza rolls in the air fryer.

Why do pizza rolls explode?

Pizza rolls explode because the water inside the sauce begins to boil as they are cooked. When the filling begins to boil, it creates pockets of hot air that eventually “leak” out of the pizza roll’s shell. Exploding pizza rolls could also mean they were overcooked.

To prevent pizza rolls from exploding, make sure you are shaking the air fryer basket or flipping the pizza rolls with tongs. Also, try reducing the temperature or cook time with your next batch if you find a lot of your pizza rolls are exploding.

Do you need to thaw pizza rolls before air frying?

Pizza rolls can be cooked frozen in less than 10 minutes.

Can you put aluminum foil and parchment paper in an air fryer?

You can cook pizza rolls right on the air fryer basket without sticking or burning. If you want to make the clean-up process easier, you can line the air fryer basket with aluminum foil or parchment paper.

Do you preheat an air fryer?

It’s not necessary to preheat an air fryer. There are many sources that say this makes the food even better, but I haven’t noticed much of a difference.

Are pizza rolls precooked?

Yes, Totino’s brand of pizza rolls are precooked. If you are not using Totino’s, refer to the packaging for exact product specifications.

Regardless, the pizza rolls should be cooked thoroughly to an internal temperature of at least 160°F.

Air Fryer Pizza Rolls

Totino’s pizza rolls in the air fryer is the easiest way to get perfect pizza rolls every time! In less than 10 minutes, you’ll have crispy air fryer pizza rolls for an after school snack, game day appetizers, or a quick weeknight meal for picky eaters.

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer recipe, appetizer, Pizza, pizza rolls, snack

Cook Time 8

Total Time 8

Servings servings

Calories 7kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

Frozen Pizza Rolls I used Totino’s but any brand will work.

Instructions

Spray air fryer basket with cooking spray, or line with aluminum foil or parchment paper, if desired.
Place up to 25 rolls in the air fryer basket. You may need to work in batches for the whole bag.
Cook at 380°F for 8-10 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through.

Notes

Reheating in the air fryer: Air fry for 2-5 minutes at 375°F degrees, or until warmed through.
Reheating in the microwave: Microwave for 30-60 seconds until warmed through. Keep in mind that the outside will no longer be crispy after microwaving.
Directions developed using 4-qt air fryer; cooking times may need to be adjusted.

Nutrition

Serving: 1 | Calories: 7kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Sodium: 13mg

Serving Size: 6 rolls

Ingredients:

Frozen Pizza Rolls (not brand specific)

Steps:

Spray air fryer basket with cooking spray, or line with aluminum foil or parchment paper, if desired.
Place up to 25 rolls in the air fryer basket. You may need to work in batches for the whole bag.
Cook at 380°F for 8-10 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through.

Directions developed using 4-qt air fryers; cooking times may need to be adjusted.

The post Air Fryer Frozen Pizza Rolls appeared first on Southern Cravings.

How to Make Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Nuggets

Anna Kate — Thu, 02 Jun 2022 19:33:20 +0000

Air fryer chicken nuggets are always delicious and cooked to the perfect crispiness! Made in just 20 minutes, this is the perfect weeknight meal for picky eaters. Learn how to make frozen chicken nuggets into a delicious, crispy snack. No more soggy breading!

Whether you are making these from scratch or pulling them out of the freezer, this method is the easiest way to make crispy chicken nuggets fast! This recipe works with Tyson Dino nuggets, Yummy Dino Buddies, homemade nuggets, regular chicken nuggets, and other fun-shaped chicken nuggets.

An air fryer cooks in about half the time of an oven. They cut down the cook time drastically! While your oven takes about 10 minutes to preheat, the air fryer is already halfway done with cooking. I never thought I would need another appliance, but I am hooked!

Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Nuggets Recipe

We all need those easy recipes that don’t require a lot of preparation. Sometimes, it’s all about convenience and getting dinner on the table quickly during those busy weeknights.

I mean, you can make homemade chicken nuggets. But, if you are in a pinch for time, pre-breaded, frozen nuggets are the ultimate time saver.

Plus, they aren’t just for kids anymore. You can make these early in the week to top salads or as a quick lunch.

More reasons why I love them:

Feeds picky eaters: Even the pickiest of eaters will latch onto a plate of crispy nuggets. If you use the fun-shaped nuggets, you get a bonus point!
Use any brand: This method works with Tyson chicken nuggets, Dino Nuggets, Perdue, Yummy Dino Buddies, dinosaur nuggets, and more.
Fast and Easy: You can cook a whole bag of chicken nuggets from frozen to done in about 20 minutes. It takes about 10 minutes to preheat an oven, so using an air fryer is a faster cooking method.
No frying: Since air frying doesn’t require oil, it’s definitely a healthier option than deep frying. Plus, using a deep fryer just makes an absolute mess!
Crispy: These come out perfectly every time. No soggy breading or falling apart. Way better than any microwave chicken nuggets.
Saves Money: The deep fry method requires a lot of extra oil, extra costs, and extra hassle. Using the air fryer is a much better way to enjoy nuggets and requires less time and effort.

Best Sauce for Chicken Nuggets

There are so many different options and combinations for dipping! Here is a list of our favorite sauces.

Ranch
Ketchup
BBQ sauce – traditional or tangy!
Honey mustard
Buffalo sauce
French fry sauce
Other leftover fast food sauces

Best Frozen Chicken Nugget Brands

This recipe isn’t brand-specific, so use any brand you like. If you have kids, fun-shaped dinosaur chicken nuggets, smiley faces, letter shapes and others are great ways to make meal time fun.

Because this is a processed-food, look for brands that use real white meat chicken and without a lot of fillers added. You can also use veggie nuggets for a plant-based option.

Like I mentioned before, this recipe isn’t the healthiest option, but it’s better than swinging through a drive-thru window. If you have dietary restrictions, obviously you should honor those restrictions. Otherwise, look at this as an easy meal that’s a great way to feed the kids fast – not a weekly staple.

Here are some of the different brands I’ve tested and enjoy using this method:

Tyson
Perdue
Trader Joe’s
Banquette

How to Cook Air Fryer Frozen Chicken Nuggets

This is not a high-brow recipe by any stretch. But, it’s a simple and quick meal that doesn’t require much time or effort.

What you need to make this:

Any brand (or shape) of frozen chicken nuggets. Look for real chicken, high quality nuggets!
Air fryer: I love my Ninja Foodi. We use this appliance at least three times per week.
Tongs
Pot holders
Favorite dipping sauce

All you need to do is spray the air fryer tray or basket with cooking spray. Add the nuggets to the basket and cook at 390 degrees for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through. Don’t forget to shake the basket or flip the nuggets half way through so they get crispy on all sides.

Depending on the air fryer you have, you may need to work in batches to prepare a whole bag of chicken nuggets.

How Long to Cook Chicken Nuggets in the Air Fryer

Air fry frozen nuggets at 390 degrees for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through.

Most store bought chicken nuggets are already fully cooked, but should reach 165 degrees internally for safe eating. Check the internal temperature with a meat thermometer to be sure.

After they are done cooking, allow them to rest for a minute or so to avoid burning little hands. This also allows the exterior to crisp up a bit more. Store any leftovers in an airtight container.

Best Way to Reheat Chicken Nuggets

If you thought the air fryer was only for cooking, think again! I love to use an air fryer for reheating pizza and other foods that should stay crispy!

This is a great method for reheating fast food nuggets, too. Reheat chicken nuggets from McDonald’s, Chick-Fil-A, Wendy’s, or other fast food restaurants.

To reheat chicken nuggets, add them to the air fryer basket and heat for about 5 minutes at 350F degrees until they are crispy and warmed through.

What to serve with Chicken Nuggets

Another thing I love about this recipe is that you can serve it with your favorite side dish or as a complete meal on its own. Here are some other side dishes to try:

Steamed vegetables
Air Fryer French Fries, curly fries, sweet potato fries
Potato dishes

Tips for the Best Chicken Nuggets

Know your air fryer: Just like every oven is different, the same goes for every air fryer. My model is likely different from yours. Be sure to follow the manual and instructions for your air fryer. Use cooking time as a reference point.
Don’t preheat: There’s no need to preheat the air fryer. Just add the nuggets to the basket and turn the unit on.
Don’t thaw: Chicken nuggets, french fries, pizza rolls, and other convenience foods can be cooked frozen.
Don’t overcrowd: Overcrowding will leave you with chicken nuggets that are unevenly cooked and possibly soggy. For the best results, add the nuggets in a single layer with a little space around for the hot air to circulate for the crispiest nuggets!

Do you need to preheat an air fryer?

You do not need to preheat an air fryer unless the instructions say to do so. Because the air fryer is much smaller than a conventional oven, the appliance heats up much faster than a regular oven. Plus, the heating element is closer to the food.

How do you cook frozen raw chicken nuggets in an air fryer?

To cook frozen, raw chicken nuggets, follow the steps in the recipe card below. Air Fry the nuggets for 8-10 minutes at 390, flipping halfway through. Take the internal temperature with a meat thermometer to ensure the nuggets reach 165 degrees F.

How do you make frozen chicken nuggets crispy?

The secret to crispy nuggets is the air fryer! Allowing plenty of room for the hot air to flow around the nuggets will give them a crispy exterior.

Why are my chicken nuggets soggy?

If your chicken nuggets are soggy, it’s likely because the air fryer basket was overcrowded or the nuggets need to continue cooking. Try removing some of the nuggets so the hot air can better circulate. Additionally, continue cooking for another 5 minutes to crisp up the exterior of the nuggets.

More Easy Air Fryer Recipes:

Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Nuggets

Course Air Fryer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword air fryer, Chicken, chicken nuggets, picky eaters

Cook Time 20

Total Time 20

Servings nuggets

Calories 10kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

Frozen Chicken Nuggets about 5 pieces per serving
Cooking Spray

Instructions

Spray air fryer basket with cooking spray.
Add nuggets (may need to work in batches for whole bag).
Cook at 390 for 20 minutes, shaking basket halfway through.

Notes

Serve with your favorite dipping sauce.

Tips for the Best Chicken Nuggets

Know your air fryer: Just like every oven is different, the same goes for every air fryer. My model is likely different from yours. Be sure to follow the manual and instructions for your air fryer. Use cooking time as a reference point.
Don’t preheat: There’s no need to preheat the air fryer. Just add the nuggets to the basket and turn the unit on.
Don’t thaw: Chicken nuggets, french fries, pizza rolls, and other convenience foods can be cooked frozen.
Don’t overcrowd: Overcrowding will leave you with chicken nuggets that are unevenly cooked and possibly soggy. For the best results, add the nuggets in a single layer with a little space around for the hot air to circulate for the crispiest nuggets!

Nutrition

The post How to Make Crispy Air Fryer Chicken Nuggets appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Loaded Nachos with Pulled Pork

Anna Kate — Wed, 09 Feb 2022 08:07:00 +0000

The ultimate loaded nachos platter is layered with pulled pork, kettle-style chips, and other nacho toppings of your choice. This great appetizer will be a huge hit game day, Super Bowl Sunday, Cinco de Mayo, or even an easy dinner. It’s the best party food.

Plus, it’s made in under 30 minutes and served right from the sheet pan!

This recipe uses leftover pulled pork, but you can use any taco meat of your choice. Or, leave the meat off for a vegetarian style nacho platter. This recipe is incredibly versatile and all of the ingredients are easily swapped for toppings you love the most!

Next Level Loaded Nachos

Most nacho recipes call for corn chips or other tortilla chips, but this version uses crispy kettle chips.

This easy recipe was inspired by a local restaurant that used giant kettle chips as the base. We fell in love the moment we chowed down. Plus, I found that the chips stay crispier than the corn chips.

Here are a few kitchen tools I recommend to make this recipe easier:

Sheet Pan: Use a large, sturdy baking sheet with a rimmed edge. This will hold the whole platter of nachos together.
Heavy Duty Aluminum Foil: Lining the baking sheet with aluminum foil will make clean up much easier. Plus, you can form “sections” using the foil to bake different variations of the nachos at one time. Let’s say, vegetarian and beef, or shredded chicken and pulled pork.

Ingredients: What toppings do you put on nachos?

Meats: Use leftover taco meat, shredded carnitas, ground beef, shredded chicken, pulled pork, shredded leftover beef brisket… whatever meat you prefer to top nachos.
Cheeses: Any taco blend or Mexican blend shredded cheese is the easiest. Other suggestions are a blend of cheddar cheese, Monterey jack, and pepper jack cheese.
Sauces: Just before serving, drizzle with white alabama bbq sauce. Or, add toppings like guacamole, salsa, pico de gallo, sour cream, nacho cheese sauce, etc.
Other toppings: Add black beans, chopped tomatoes, pickled red onion, green onions, black olives, green chili, jalapeno pepper, canned corn, onion, etc.

How to Make the Ultimate Nachos Platter

Step 1: Toast the chips.

The secret to crispy chips – not soggy ones – is pre-toasting the chips. Spread the chips on the foil lined baking sheet. Overlapping will help hold the toppings together so they don’t fall to the bottom of the pan.

Bake the chips for about 5-10 minutes to toughen them a little. Then, top with a layer of cheese. The cheese will act as a barrier between the toppings and the chips, keeping the chips crunchier longer!

Step 2: Layer nacho toppings

Begin by spreading the meat onto the chips, making sure to cover each chip. No one likes a topping-less nacho chip!

After the meat, layer on the other toppings. We love to use pickled red onion for a little tanginess to every bite!

You could also spread beans on this layer…sliced jalapeno pepper, red pepper, other vegetables, and different types of cheese.

Step 3: Bake and finish.

When you are satisfied with your nacho platter, place the baking sheet in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted and the ingredients are warmed through.

I recommend waiting until after baking to add fresh salsas, guacamole and other sauces. You can even finish with a squeeze of fresh lime juice!

Other appetizers to serve with nachos

Take your spread to the next level with these other great appetizers:

Tips for the Ultimate Nacho Platter

Best chips for nachos

This recipe uses kettle-style potato chips. If preferred, you can use tortilla chips, blue chips, or other corn chips.

I do not recommend using scoops or regular potato chips. You need a sturdy chip to hold up all of those nacho toppings.

Best cheese for nachos

Mexican Blend or Taco Blend shredded cheeses are excellent choices to stick with the cuisine’s theme.But, really any shredded cheese will work for this recipe.

For better melting, shred a block of cheese at home using a food processor or cheese grater.

Broiling vs baking

Baking a platter of nachos is preferred to broiling. If you only broil the nachos, you could end up with portions of burned, over-crisped toppings while the underneath portions are cold or undercooked. Baking circulates the heat throughout the nachos so everything is cooked evenly.

If desired, broil at the end to crisp up exposed edges of the chips.

Avoid soggy nachos

Leave the sauces, salsas, and other moisture-heavy ingredients until after baking.

Also, pre-bake the chips then top with cheese to create a barrier between the chips and the toppings, keeping the chips as crispy as possible.

Pulled Pork Nachos Recipe

Pulled Pork Nachos are layered with delicious pulled pork, potato chips, crisp onion and cheese! It’s an awesome addition to a game day menu, a quick appetizer or a casual weeknight meal.

Course Appetizers

Cuisine American

Keyword apps, nachos

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 20

Total Time 30

Servings

Calories 5kcal

Author Anna Kate

Ingredients

Leftover Pulled Pork Beef or Chicken
Kettle Style Potato Chips
1 green onion roughly chopped
½ red onion roughly diced
1 container blue cheese crumbled
cooking spray

Instructions

Preheat oven to 375F degrees. Line a baking sheet with heavy-duty foil. Lightly spray with nonstick cooking spray.
Add single layer of potato chips to the baking sheet. It’s ok to overlap.
Layer with pulled pork, onion and cheese. You can also add any additional vegetables desired.
Bake uncovered for 15-20 minutes or until warmed through and cheese is melted.

Nutrition

The post Loaded Nachos with Pulled Pork appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Pigs in a Blanket Recipe (Mini Hot Dog Appetizer)

Anna Kate — Thu, 27 Jan 2022 18:11:57 +0000

Learn how to make Pigs in a Blanket! This classic potluck appetizer is made with mini hot dogs wrapped in buttery crescent rolls, baked until golden brown, then sprinkled with Everything Bagel Seasoning. Make these in under 30 minutes from start to finish.

It’s not a party without Pigs in a Blanket! This is one of those easy recipes everyone loves! It’s perfect for busy weeknights when you are short on time. Plus, these are fun to make with the kids.

Pigs in a Blanket are the perfect solution to game days and Super Bowl Sunday, and they almost always make an appearance as an appetizer for Thanksgiving, Friendsgiving, Christmas, and other potlucks, too.

Make these ahead of time and keep warm until they are ready to serve. We like to dip these in yellow mustard, but any favorite sauce of your choice will work.

This is a smaller version of hot dog roll-ups, but instead of using large hot dogs, this recipe uses mini hot dogs or Lil’ Smokies. You might also hear these called Crescent Dogs, Hot Dog Roll-Ups, Mummy Dogs, and other similar names.

How to Make Pigs in a Blanket

Ingredients

Crescent Roll Dough – Choose any flavor of Crescent Rolls you prefer. We love the buttery flavor, but you can choose original crescent rolls, too.
Mini hot dogs – These could also be labeled as cocktail sausages, Lil’ Smokies, or Mini Franks. Alternatively, you can use large hot dogs and cut to size.
Everything Bagel Seasoning – This is optional but adds a lot of flavor to this appetizer. Feel free to omit or season half and half for a variation.
Dipping Sauce – Yellow mustard is the perfect dip for this appetizer, but ketchup and BBQ sauce are popular options, too.

This recipe is super easy to make and only requires a few steps:

Cut the crescent roll dough into smaller triangles. To do this, you will want to separate crescent dough rolls and slice them with a pizza cutter into three smaller triangles.
Then, place the mini hot dogs on the wide end and wrap dough triangle around the sausage.
Brush with butter and season with Everything Bagel Seasoning.

Slice crescent roll dough into triangles.

Roll up each mini hot dog in dough.

Place seam-side down and brush with melted butter.

Sprinkle with Everything Bagel Seasoning.

Then, place on a baking sheet and bake until they are golden brown! Serve these warm with a dipping sauce.

Other appetizers to go with Pigs in a Blanket

Appetizers and side dishes to serve with Pigs in a Blanket:

Pigs in a Blanket Variations

If you are ready to up the ante on the classic pigs in a blanket, here are a few ideas to try:

Use a plain, regular-sized hot dog and wrap in crescent dough for a larger version of these mini dogs.
Place a strips of cheese inside the crescent roll, like American cheese or cheddar cheese.
Top with poppy seeds or other seasoning.
Use breakfast sausage for a popular breakfast idea.

Dipping Sauce Ideas

Try these dipping sauces for pigs in a blanket:

Dijon mustard
BBQ sauce
Ketchup
Honey mustard

When these pop out of the oven, you know there are good times ahead! This simple recipe will please the whole family!

Pigs in a Blanket

Learn how to make Pigs in a Blanket! This classic potluck appetizer is made with mini hot dogs wrapped in buttery crescent rolls, baked until golden brown, then sprinkled with Everything Bagel Seasoning. Make these in under 30 minutes from start to finish.

Course Appetizer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword appetizer, finger food, game day, super bowl sunday

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 15

Total Time 25

Servings servings

Calories 801kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

16 count Crescent Rolls
48 count cocktail-sized sausages
8 tablespoons butter 1 stick
Everything Bagel Seasoning optional
Yellow mustard for dipping optional

Instructions

Preheat oven to 375°F. Unroll both cans of the dough; separate into 16 triangles. Cut each triangle lengthwise into 3 narrow triangles. Lightly flour your work surface if necessary.
Place sausage on widest (or square) end of each triangle. Roll the sausage and dough together to the opposite point. Place point side down on cookie sheet. Continue until all 48 sausages have been rolled in each crescent roll.
Brush each roll with melted butter and sprinkle everything bagel seasoning on top of each sausage roll.
Bake 12 to 15 minutes or until golden brown. Immediately remove from baking sheet. Serve warm with yellow mustard for dipping.

Nutrition

FAQ for Crescent Roll Hot Dogs Recipe

Can you make mini crescent roll hot dogs ahead of time?

Make these the night before and allow them to cool completely. Then, transfer them to a paper towel-lined food storage container and refrigerate them.

To reheat pigs in a blanket, place them on a baking sheet and warm in a 325 degree oven for about 10 minutes.

How do you keep pigs in a blanket warm?

If you’re hosting a party, bake these until golden brown. Then, transfer them to a warmer oven.

You can also transfer them from the baking sheet into an oven-safe serving dish or disposable aluminum container and keep warm until you are ready to serve.

How do you keep pigs in a blanket from getting soggy?

To prevent these mini hot-dog roll ups from turning soggy, allow them to cool completely before storing them.

Line your storage container with a paper towel and place the roll-ups inside and refrigerate.

Why are pigs in a blanket called pigs in a blanket?

This wasn’t always a favorite game day appetizer. Pigs in a Blanket date back to the 1600s where field workers would wrap sausages in bread dough so they could eat lunch quickly and return to work.

They regained popularity in the 1950s and 1960s as a party appetizer. Now, they are still popular for potlucks, parties, and as a quick and easy dinner recipe.

What goes with Pigs in a Blanket?

If you are serving this at a potluck, prepare other appetizers to fill out the spread, or prepare a few side dishes to serve this as the main course.

What is a good dipping sauce For Pigs In A Blanket?

We use yellow mustard exclusively, but you can use any of your favorite dipping sauces. Try dijon mustard, BBQ sauce, ketchup, honey mustard, etc.

The post Pigs in a Blanket Recipe (Mini Hot Dog Appetizer) appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Hot Ham and Cheese Sliders

Anna Kate — Thu, 06 Jan 2022 16:27:00 +0000

Melty ham and cheese sliders are the perfect finger foods! These Hawaiian roll sandwiches are packed with layers of juicy baked ham, swiss cheese, and your favorite condiments. This hearty snack recipe comes together in under 30 minutes!

If you are making these as a part of an appetizer spread, be sure to include other game-day snacks, like a charcuterie board, chicken wings, spinach and artichoke dip. The great thing about this recipe is that you can customize these sandwiches with whatever meats, cheeses, and condiments you like!

Easy Hawaiian Roll Sliders

These sliders are a family favorite – mainly because you can swap out ingredients as you like. You could even make a sandwich platter with different meat and cheese combinations.

Because these are all baked together as one giant sandwich casserole, it’s easy to feed a lot of people with minimal work. Just assemble the sliders, bake, and serve with a couple of side dishes. Done!

Tools to make this recipe easier

Bake these in a casserole dish for the best results. I prefer to use a lightly-colored glass casserole dish to bake these in. You can also use a disposable aluminum pan if you are taking these to a party.
Use a casserole carrier to transport these while hot or keep them warm so folks can snack as needed.
A silicone spatula is great for spreading mayo and mustard across the bottoms of the rolls. You can also leave off the condiments or add others as desired.
Use a pizza cutter for slicing the sliders once they are done.

Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

King’s Hawaiian Rolls make this recipe! The sweetness of the bread and the savory toppings are a delicious combination. You could also use any sliders, mini rolls, or even dinner rolls you find at the store.
Feel free to use any sandwich meat you like if ham isn’t your thing. Think of all of the other options like corned beef, roast beef, leftover spiral ham, turkey, leftover or sliced deli chicken. Make sure whatever meat you choose is sliced thin enough for a small sandwich.
Experiment with different cheeses like cheddar, provolone, Mozzarella, American, Colby, Monterey Jack, Havarti, Gouda, mozzarella, Muenster, etc.
Feel free to add or leave off condiments or add on different toppings like pickled red onion, pickles, or whatever else you enjoy on a sandwich.

Making Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls

Regardless of your meat and cheese selections, the process is very much the same!

Slice the Slider Rolls

First, start by slicing the rolls through the center so you have tops and bottoms. Do your best to keep the rolls connected. It’s much easier and faster to cut 3 or 4 at a time if you can’t manage the entire package.

Then, place the bottoms in a casserole dish. Spread the mayo and mustard together with as much or as little as you please.

Layer and Make the Sandwiches

Layer with the deli meat and cheese, alternating each layer. Add the tops to the sandwiches.

Spread on the condiments.

Layer the meat.

Layer the cheese.

Add the tops of the rolls.

Tip: If your rolls become disconnected when slicing, make a mental note of how many bottoms are laid across the top of the dish so you add the same number of top rolls onto the meat and cheese layers.

Bake the sandwiches

Lightly cover the dish with foil and bake for about 20 minutes or until the cheese is melty and gooey! I like to brown the tops for the last few minutes of cooking for a little color.

When you remove them from the oven, let them stand for a few minutes before slicing. Otherwise, the sandwiches will completely fall apart.

Serve!

Slice with a large knife or pizza cutter, then serve with chips or your favorite side dish.

Slice the slider sandwiches after cooling.

Serve!

Can you reheat ham and cheese sliders?

These sliders are excellent as leftovers, too. To reheat these, place them in an oven-safe dish or baking sheet and warm in a 350F degree oven for about 10 minutes or until warmed through.

You can also pop these in the microwave for a minute at a time, but they will likely turn out soggy.

What do you top ham and cheese sliders with?

There are many recipes similar to this one that add sauce over the top of the sliders. I’ve found this makes them soggy, messy, and difficult to eat.

If you choose, you can also brush a little butter over the top of the sandwiches, but there is still plenty of flavor without butter or sauce.

Side dishes to serve with ham and cheese sliders

Just about anything goes with ham and cheese sliders, but here are a few side dishes that are not chips:

Hot Ham and Cheese Sliders

Melty ham and cheese sliders are the perfect finger foods! These Hawaiian roll sandwiches are layered with juicy baked ham, swiss cheese, and your favorite condiments. This hearty snack recipe comes together in under 30 minutes!

Course Appetizer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword crowd pleasing recipes, finger foods, Game day food, Party recipes, snacks

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 20

Resting Time 5

Total Time 30

Servings sandwiches

Calories 180kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

12 pack of Hawaiian sweet slider rolls slider-sized, cut in half
¾ pound deli ham thinly sliced
¾ pound Swiss cheese thinly sliced
Mayonnaise optional
Dijon Mustard optional

Instructions

Preheat oven to 350°F. Lightly grease a 9×13 inch casserole dish. Set aside.
Using a large serrated knife, slice the rolls in half so you have a ‘slab’ of tops and a ‘slab’ of bottoms. Place the bottoms in the prepared dish. (It’s easier to slice 3-4 connected rolls at a time vs. each individually.)
Spread a thin layer of mayonnaise and mustard over the bottom of the rolls using a knife or silicone spatula.
Begin layering the ham and cheese on top of the rolls, alternating layers of ham and cheese.
Add the top ‘slab’ of rolls on top of the layers of ham and cheese.
Cover with aluminum foil and place in the oven for about 20 minutes or until cheese has melted.
Uncover and cook for about 3 to 5 more minutes, or until the tops of the rolls have browned slightly.
Remove from the oven and let stand for 5 minutes.
Using a pizza cutter or sharp knife, slice into individual sliders and serve immediately. Sliders are best warm and fresh.

Notes

Substitutions:

Instead of ham, try corned beef, roast beef, leftover spiral ham, turkey, leftover or sliced deli chicken.
Experiment with different cheeses like cheddar, provolone, Mozzarella, American, Colby, Monterey Jack, Havarti, Gouda, mozzarella, Muenster, etc.

Here are a few side dishes that are not chips:

Topping Ideas: Add or leave off condiments and toppings as desired.

Pickled red onion
Pickles
Siracha mayo
Different mustards

Other appetizer ideas:

Nutrition

The post Hot Ham and Cheese Sliders appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Air Fryer Buffalo Wings Recipe

Anna Kate — Tue, 04 Jan 2022 15:13:17 +0000

Toss them with Frank’s red hot buffalo sauce and serve with blue cheese or ranch dressing for dipping. These can be made in under 30 minutes!

Continue reading for recipe details, cooking tips, reheating/storing info, and more.

These make a great appetizer for gamedays! Serve these with other delicious finger foods like a charcuterie board, spinach and artichoke dip, and nachos for an awesome spread!

There’s something about tangy buffalo wings that get me every time! Instead of picking these up at a restaurant, recreate these delicious chicken wings at home and save some money.

Air Fryer Wings

This recipe is similar to my oven baked chicken wings recipe. But, instead of baking, you are air frying.

An air fryer is like a small convection oven that cooks all kinds of foods evenly and perfectly done every time. This is the air fryer model I use and I absolutely love it! We use ours several times a week. It’s definitely worth the investment.

The thing I love the most about air-frying foods is that there is no wet batter, breading, or any of the mess and complications you get when deep frying. Just a little seasoning and olive oil and you can have restaurant-quality, food in minutes.

If you are looking for another great chicken dish in the air fryer, try out these air fryer chicken breasts for a lean entrée!

The Best Hot Wings Recipe

The cooking time will vary slightly depending on the size of your chicken wings. Be aware that you may need to adjust your cooking time accordingly.

Recipe Notes to Remember

This recipe uses fresh, thawed, uncooked chicken wings. See below for information on using pre-cooked chicken wings.
Frank’s Hot Sauce is a crowd favorite, but you can use any type of sauce you like, if preferred.
Air fryer units and chicken wing sizes vary across the board. Keep this is mind when preparing this recipe.
Find my air fryer unit here.
Use a meat thermometer to ensure the inside of the chicken is cooked thoroughly.

Step 1: Apply Chicken Dry Rub

Add the thawed chicken wings to a mixing bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and toss to coat. Then, mix together the garlic powder, salt, and pepper. Sprinkle the mixture onto the chicken, and rub on to each wing so that they are well-coated with the seasoning.

Step 2: Air Fry the Wings

Place the wings in the basket of the air fryer (it’s ok if they overlap). Set the unit to 400F for 25 minutes, tossing every 5 minutes. Tossing at frequent intervals helps each piece of chicken to cook and crisp evenly.

Step 3: Toss with buffalo sauce

While the chicken cooks, whisk together the hot sauce, butter, and garlic powder in a large bowl.

Make sure the bowl is large enough for the wings to be added when they are cooked. After the wings are cooked and read 165F degrees internally, add to the large bowl of sauce, toss, and serve!

How long to air fry chicken wings at 400

Depending on the size of the chicken wings and your air fryer unit, cooking times may vary. This recipe has been tested at 20-25 minute cooking time at 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

Because of this, it’s important not to overfill your air fryer and to toss the chicken wings frequently throughout the cooking process.

How to Make Buffalo Sauce

The buffalo sauce makes these wings! This is a simple combination of Frank’s Red Hot Sauce, butter, and a little garlic powder.

While the wings are cooking in the air fryer, whisk together the ingredients in a large mixing bowl. Toss in the cooked wings and stir to coat. If your mixing bowl has a lid, even better! Pop the lid on and shake up the wings until they are coated and saucy.

Recipe Variations

Use pre-cooked chicken.

Pre-cooked chicken nuggets, tenders, and wings are a great option to keep in your freezer. It can be prepped quickly on a busy night and can be served with veggies or over a quick salad.

To make this recipe with pre-cooked chicken, follow the directions on the package of pre-cooked chicken for a convection (or toaster) oven, then toss with the sauce and serve with a side dish or dipping sauces. You may need to rotate the chicken pieces every so often to achieve even cooking.

Try a variety of sauces.

Many favorite wing restaurants also sell their own sauces. Some are even in the grocery store. Add a few other sauces to your grocery list and experiment with different flavors.

Or, skip the sauce altogether and use this homemade dry rub for simple chicken wings.

What to serve with chicken wings

Baked sweet potato or regular baked potato
Side salad
Roasted asparagus
Sautéed green beans
Pasta salad
Caprese salad

Tips for reheating, leftovers, and storing

To reheat prepared chicken wings, place them in the air fryer at 375 for about 10-15 minutes or until heated through.
Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-5 days.
Use the leftover chicken wings to top salads or reheat in the air fryer.

FAQ: Air Fryer Buffalo Wings

How long should I put buffalo wings in the air fryer?

At 400 degrees, buffalo wings should be cooked for about 20-25 minutes depending on their size.

Do you need breading for air fryer?

The beauty of the air fryer is that no breading or batter is required.

Can I use a wet batter in an air fryer?

No, wet batter is not recommended for the air fryer.

Can you put raw chicken in air fryer?

Yes, any raw meats can be thoroughly cooked in the air fryer.

Air Fryer Buffalo Wings Recipe

Learn how to make buffalo chicken wings in the air fryer! Tangy and crispy but without the breading, deep-frying, or mess to clean up afterward. Air fryer chicken wings give you crispy skin on the outside while still juicy and tender on the inside. Toss them with Frank's red hot buffalo sauce and serve with blue cheese or ranch dressing for dipping. These can be made in under 30 minutes!

Course Appetizer Recipes

Cuisine American

Keyword appetizers, buffalo wings, Chicken, Chicken Wings, finger foods, Game day food

Prep Time 10

Cook Time 25

Total Time 35

Servings people

Calories 368kcal

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Air Fryer

Ingredients

For the Wings:

2 ½ pounds chicken wings thawed and uncooked; about 20 wings
1 tablespoon garlic powder
olive oil for drizzling
kosher salt
black pepper

Buffalo Wing Sauce Ingredients:

1 cup Frank’s RedHot® Original Cayenne Pepper Hot Sauce
½ cup butter unsalted and melted
1 teaspoon garlic powder

Instructions

Preheat the air fryer to 400°F for about 5 minutes.
While the air fryer is preheating, combine garlic powder, salt, and pepper in a small bowl.
To a large mixing bowl, add the chicken wings and drizzle with olive oil. Toss until lightly coated.
Then, sprinkle the dry rub mixture onto the chicken and rub on to each wing so that they are well-coated with seasoning.
Spray the air fryer basket with non-stick cooking spray. Add wings to air fryer basket, being careful not to over-fill.
Air fry at 400°F degrees for 25 to 30 minutes, shaking the basket or tossing wings with tongs every 5 minutes during cooking. The wings are cooked through when an internal meat thermometer reads 165°F.
While the wings are cooking, mix the butter, hot sauce, and garlic powder in a bowl large enough to accommodate the wings. Add cooked wings and toss to coat.*
Serve immediately.

Notes

Cook in batches, if needed, depending on the size of your air fryer.
Instead of coating the wings with sauce, serve the wings plain with the sauce on the side for dipping.
Experiment with different sauces and dry rubs for your own take on these wings!

Nutrition

The post Air Fryer Buffalo Wings Recipe appeared first on Southern Cravings.

Fluffy Sheet Pan Pancakes Recipe

Anna Kate — Mon, 06 Dec 2021 17:02:07 +0000

The best way to make pancakes for a crowd is right here! Made with a boxed mix, this sheet pan pancake recipe makes delicious, fluffy pancakes that are ready to serve a crowd in just 20 minutes. No more standing over a hot stove or eating pancakes in shifts. Top with fresh fruits, butter, and syrup, and enjoy!

If you thought sheet pan meals were just for dinner, think again! Sheet Pan meals are super trendy, but this trend may stick around for good. I love a good one-pot wonder for any meal, so if you are interested in saving dishes, check out my recipes there.

Pancakes are a fan favorite! But, they are a lot of hands-on work for whoever is cooking them. Now, slaving over a hot stove and flipping pancakes is a thing of the past when this breakfast icon is baked in the oven.

The thing I love most about this recipe is that you can use it to feed your family on Saturday mornings or feed a whole house full of visitors. Whatever size crowd, this recipe will solve all of your breakfast woes. You can even make the batter ahead of time and bake in the morning!

If you love make-ahead breakfasts, definitely check out this overnight breakfast casserole and old-fashioned ambrosia salad for the makings of a beautiful Christmas breakfast or brunch.

How to Make Sheet Pan Pancakes

Many recipes will tell you to bake at a lower oven temperature for longer, but the hot, quick cooking time yields light and fluffy pancakes. While the pancake batter is only semi-homemade, the flavor is still delicious!

Here are a few kitchen tools I recommend to make this recipe easier:

Sheet Pan – This tool is key for the best results. You want to use a 1/2 size sheet pan, which measures about 17 x 13 inches and has a 1-inch rim around the edges.
Whisk
Wooden spoon
Pizza Cutter – I like to use a pizza cutter to cut quickly and evenly. This tool will just whiz right down the pan for perfectly square pancakes.

Notes on pancake ingredients

This recipe calls for Bisquick, but you can use any premade pancake mix in its place. Swap out the brand but keep the measurements and remaining ingredients the same.
The instructions say to add fruit to the batter before baking, but you can opt to use the fruits (or whatever else) as a topping instead of mixing into the batter.

Step 1: Make the pancake batter.

Grab a large mixing bowl and add in the pancake mix, eggs, and milk. Then, stir until the batter is just combined. The batter should be lumpy but without “streaks” of white flour.

1. Add ingredients to the bowl.
2. Stir to combine.
3. Make sure ingredients are well incorporated.
4. Be careful not to overmix.

You want to be careful not to overmix the batter as it will turn into chewy pancakes. And nobody likes that!

Step 2: Add toppings.

After the batter rests for about 5 minutes, pour into a lightly greased sheet pan. Sprinkle in the toppings in whatever order you like.

Pour batter into sheet pan and smooth until even.
Top with fruit as desired.

This recipe is great for picky eaters or a group with different pallets. Try splitting the pan in half or quarters by adding different toppings to the different sections of the pancake batter.

Step 3: Bake!

Bake uncovered in a 425F degree oven for about 10-15 minutes, or until the center of the pancake is springy to the touch.

Allow the pancake to cool for a few minutes, then cut into 10-12 squares and serve. You can top with additional fruits, butter, or syrup!

Recipe Variations

Use different fruits. I recommend sticking to berries, like blackberries, raspberries, strawberries, and blueberries. You could also try sliced bananas, chopped apples, or peaches, but I haven’t tested this recipe with those options.
Stir nuts into the batter, like toasted walnuts or pecan halves for extra crunch and earthy flavor.
Add chocolate chips for extra sweetness and top with whipped cream.
Add in additional flavors like vanilla extract, cinnamon, nutmeg, etc.

What to serve with pancakes

Tips for baking pancakes

Experiment with different toppings

Try different fruits, nuts, chocolate chips, and other toppings that you family enjoys. You can also add the toppings just before serving for a plain, old-fashioned pancake.

If you have picky eaters, you can divide up different sections of the pancake and only add certain toppings to certain areas.

Broil for additional color

Some people may want a little additional color to their pancake. This recipe was created to yield a light and fluffy texture just like you would get from a restaurant. Because of that, the color is very light.

To add additional color, broil on low until the top is browned to your liking. Be aware that this may dry out the pancake.

Don’t overmix.

It’s tempting to whisk the batter until all the lumps are gone. However, overmixing activates the gluten in the batter which will result in a tougher, chewier pancake than you want.

Just mix until the ingredients are well incorporated and there are no patches of flour left. Some lumps are ok and will smooth out when the batter rests. The batter should be thick and not runny, with a few lumps.

Let the batter rest.

Allowing the batter to rest will help the gluten to relax and the lumps to smooth out slightly. This only takes about 5 minutes.

FAQ: Baked Pancakes

Why don’t my pancakes come out fluffy?

Overmixing pancake batter causes dense textures. Just mix until ingredients are well incorporated. That means there may be some lumps leftover.

What is the secret to making pancakes?

Make sure your ingredients are fresh and not expired. Don’t over mix the batter and allow it to rest before baking.

Does pancake batter need to rest?

Let rest for 5 minutes to allow the gluten to relax. Lumps will smooth a little during that time.

Should pancake batter be thin or thick?

Batter should be slightly lumpy and somewhat thick. It should ot be runny.

Sheet Pan Pancakes

The best way to make pancakes for a crowd! Made with a boxed mix, this sheet pan pancake recipe makes delicious, fluffy pancakes that are ready to serve a crowd in just 20 minutes. No more standing over a hot stove or eating pancakes in shifts. Top with fresh fruits, butter, and syrup, and enjoy!

Cuisine American

Keyword Breakfast, Christmas, christmas breakfast, crowd pleasing recipes, easy recipes, pancakes

Prep Time 5

Cook Time 10

Resting Time 5

Total Time 20

Servings servings

Author Anna Kate

Equipment

Ingredients

4 cups Bisquick or other pancake mix
2 cups milk
4 large eggs
1 cup strawberries washed and sliced
½ cup blueberries washed

Instructions

Preheat the oven to 425°F. Lightly grease a ½ size sheet pan. Set aside.
To a large mixing bowl, combine pancake mix, eggs, and milk and stir just until the batter is combined. Do not over mix! The batter should be thick and not runny, with a few lumps.
Allow the pancake batter to rest for 5 minutes.*
Then, pour the pancake batter into the baking sheet. Smooth with the back of a wooden spoon so that the batter is distributed evenly.
Top the batter with fruit or other desired add-ins.
Bake uncovered for 10-15 minutes or until the center is set and springy when touched.
When done, use a pizza cutter to slice the pancake into 10-12 pieces. Serve warm with additional fruit, butter, and syrup if desired.

Notes

Allowing the batter to rest will help the gluten to relax and the lumps to smooth out slightly.
To add additional color, broil on low until the top is browned to your liking. Be aware that this may dry out the pancake.
Try different fruits, nuts, chocolate chips, and other toppings that you family enjoys. You can also add the toppings just before serving for a plain, old-fashioned pancake.

Nutrition

Serving: 2grams

The post Fluffy Sheet Pan Pancakes Recipe appeared first on Southern Cravings.